WO2023051479A1 - Display module and imaging control method - Google Patents

Display module and imaging control method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023051479A1
WO2023051479A1 PCT/CN2022/121488 CN2022121488W WO2023051479A1 WO 2023051479 A1 WO2023051479 A1 WO 2023051479A1 CN 2022121488 W CN2022121488 W CN 2022121488W WO 2023051479 A1 WO2023051479 A1 WO 2023051479A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
image
pixel
sub
polarization
displayed
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2022/121488
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
邱孟
高少锐
吴巨帅
冯国华
罗伟城
孙上
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Publication of WO2023051479A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023051479A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02FOPTICAL DEVICES OR ARRANGEMENTS FOR THE CONTROL OF LIGHT BY MODIFICATION OF THE OPTICAL PROPERTIES OF THE MEDIA OF THE ELEMENTS INVOLVED THEREIN; NON-LINEAR OPTICS; FREQUENCY-CHANGING OF LIGHT; OPTICAL LOGIC ELEMENTS; OPTICAL ANALOGUE/DIGITAL CONVERTERS
    • G02F1/00Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics
    • G02F1/01Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour 
    • G02F1/13Devices or arrangements for the control of the intensity, colour, phase, polarisation or direction of light arriving from an independent light source, e.g. switching, gating or modulating; Non-linear optics for the control of the intensity, phase, polarisation or colour  based on liquid crystals, e.g. single liquid crystal display cells
    • G02F1/133Constructional arrangements; Operation of liquid crystal cells; Circuit arrangements
    • G02F1/1333Constructional arrangements; Manufacturing methods
    • G02F1/1335Structural association of cells with optical devices, e.g. polarisers or reflectors
    • G02F1/13363Birefringent elements, e.g. for optical compensation
    • GPHYSICS
    • G06COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
    • G06TIMAGE DATA PROCESSING OR GENERATION, IN GENERAL
    • G06T3/00Geometric image transformation in the plane of the image
    • G06T3/40Scaling the whole image or part thereof
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/30Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
    • G09F9/33Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements being semiconductor devices, e.g. diodes
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements
    • G09F9/30Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements
    • G09F9/35Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements in which the desired character or characters are formed by combining individual elements being liquid crystals
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04NPICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N9/00Details of colour television systems
    • H04N9/12Picture reproducers
    • H04N9/31Projection devices for colour picture display, e.g. using electronic spatial light modulators [ESLM]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K59/00Integrated devices, or assemblies of multiple devices, comprising at least one organic light-emitting element covered by group H10K50/00
    • H10K59/10OLED displays

Definitions

  • the embodiments of the present application relate to the field of optical technologies, and in particular, to a display module and an imaging control method.
  • Display devices such as virtual reality (VR) devices, achieve deep immersion by satisfying a large angle of view (angle of view, FOV) and high resolution.
  • the content viewed in the currently used VR devices only reaches 10-20 points per degree (PPD), which cannot meet the resolution limit of 1’ (60PPD) of the human eye, so that the image seen by the user has a screen door effect.
  • PPD points per degree
  • 60PPD resolution limit of 1’
  • high-resolution display screens can be used, but in order to meet the size requirements of VR devices, silicon-based organic light-emitting diodes (micro-OLED) must be used technology display, but the high-resolution micro-OLED costs more.
  • the resolution of the display screen can be indirectly improved through a resolution enhancement technology, but currently there is no feasible resolution enhancement solution applied to a display device.
  • Embodiments of the present application provide a display module and an imaging control method, which are used to provide a resolution enhancement solution applied to a VR device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a display module, including a display component, a pixel position adjustment component, and a control component.
  • the display component includes a plurality of pixels, and each pixel in the plurality of pixels includes a plurality of sub-pixels; the display component, It is used to display multi-frame images in time under the control of the control component; multi-frame images are obtained by sub-pixel decomposition of the image to be displayed, and the resolution of the multi-frame images is the same as that of the display component, and the resolution of the multi-frame images Smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed; the pixel position adjustment component is used to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time division under the control of the control component; wherein, the time when the display component displays the first image is adjusted with the pixel position adjustment component Time synchronization of the first image, where the first image is any image in multiple frames of images.
  • the human eyes can see high-resolution images by using the persistence of vision and visual synthesis functions of the human eyes. Decompose the image to be displayed by sub-pixel sampling to improve the smoothness of the edge and reduce the jaggedness.
  • the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization converter and a polarization displacement device; the polarization converter is used to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter under the control of the control component, and the target polarization The light bears one frame of images in multiple frames of images; the polarization displacement device is used to output the target polarized light at the first position when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the first polarization direction, and output the target polarized light at the polarization converter output When the polarization direction of the target polarized light is the second polarization direction, the target polarized light is output at the second position.
  • control component is specifically used to receive the image to be displayed, decompose the image to be displayed at sub-pixel level to obtain multiple frames of images, and send the multiple frames of images to the display component in time division.
  • the polarization shifting device is a birefringent device or a polarization grating.
  • the birefringent device is a non-diffractive device and does not have inherent dispersion characteristics, so that the light after passing through the birefringent device will not be dispersed, further improving the imaging effect.
  • the polarization converter includes twisted nematic liquid crystals or in-plane spun liquid crystals; or the polarization converter includes cholesteric liquid crystals and 1/4 wave plates.
  • the pixel position adjustment component is a motor.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image in the multi-frame image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in at least h adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed;
  • h is the number of images in the multi-frame images
  • the first image is any image in the multi-frame images
  • the first pixel is any pixel in the first image.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is determined according to the pixel value of the sub-pixel that is the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the set area of the image to be displayed;
  • the geometric center of the set area is the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed.
  • the sub-pixel value of the sampling position is determined by the sub-pixel value of the same color around the sampling position, which can reduce the occurrence of color fringes around the displayed image.
  • this method may also be used only for the determination of sub-pixel values within a set range of four weeks.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is obtained by weighting and summing the pixel values of the sub-pixels included in the set area with the same color as the first sub-pixel;
  • the weight of the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the setting area is inversely proportional to the distance between the sub-pixels; The distance between sample locations in the image to be displayed.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
  • q(i, j) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel
  • i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed
  • j represents the ordinate of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed
  • Q(i,j) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 and ⁇ 5 represent the weights respectively.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
  • q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel
  • i represents the abscissa of the pixel point of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • j+1 represents the pixel of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • the ordinate of the point, Q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4 represent the weights, respectively.
  • the multi-frame images include a first image and a second image
  • the control component is specifically configured to input the multi-frame images to the display component in time division, so that the display component displays the multi-frame images in time division
  • the time unit controls the pixel position adjustment component to output the first image at the first position
  • the second time unit controls the pixel position adjustment component to output the second image at the second position.
  • the distance between the first position and the second position in the horizontal direction is Px/2; or, the distance between the first position and the second position in the vertical direction is Py/2; or, the distance between the first position and the second position in the horizontal direction
  • the interval above is Px/2 and the interval between the first position and the second position in the vertical direction is Py/2; the first time unit and the second time unit are temporally adjacent.
  • control component is specifically configured to control the polarization converter to adjust the input polarization direction of the target polarized light carrying the first image to the first polarization direction within the first time unit, and within the second time unit controlling the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light carrying the second image to the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light carrying the first image output by the polarization displacement device is the same as that of the output carrying the second image
  • the distance between the second positions of the target polarized light in the horizontal direction is Px/2; Px represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the horizontal direction.
  • control component is specifically configured to control the polarization converter to adjust the input polarization direction of the target polarized light carrying the first image to the first polarization direction within the first time unit, and within the second time unit controlling the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light carrying the second image to the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light carrying the first image output by the polarization displacement device is the same as that of the output carrying the second image
  • the distance between the second positions of the target polarized light in the vertical direction is Py/2; Py represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the vertical direction.
  • control component is specifically configured to control the polarization converter to adjust the input polarization direction of the target polarized light carrying the first image to the first polarization direction within the first time unit, and within the second time unit controlling the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light carrying the second image to the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light carrying the first image output by the polarization displacement device is the same as that of the output carrying the second image
  • the second position of the target polarized light is spaced by Py/2 in the vertical direction and shifted by Px/2 in the horizontal direction, Py represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the vertical direction, and Px represents The distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the vertical direction.
  • the polarization converter includes twisted nematic liquid crystals or in-plane spun liquid crystals; or the polarization converter includes cholesteric liquid crystals and 1/4 wave plates.
  • the polarization displacement device is a birefringent liquid crystal
  • the birefringent liquid crystal adopts quartz crystal, barium borate crystal, lithium niobate crystal or titanium dioxide crystal or liquid crystal polymer.
  • the display module further includes a folded light path, which is located between the display component and the pixel position adjustment component, and the folded light path is used to transmit the target polarized light of any image carrying multiple frames of images to the pixel position Adjust components.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an imaging control method, the method is applied to a display device, the display device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component, the display component includes a plurality of pixels, each of the plurality of pixels includes a plurality of sub-pixels pixel; the method includes: receiving the image to be displayed, and decomposing the image to be displayed at sub-pixel level to obtain a multi-frame image; the resolution of each frame of the image in the multi-frame image is the same as the resolution of the display component, and the resolution of the multi-frame image is smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed Display the resolution of the image; control the pixel position adjustment component to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time-sharing; wherein, the time when the display component displays the first image is synchronized with the time when the pixel position adjustment component adjusts the first image, and the first image is any image in the multi-frame images.
  • sub-pixel-level decomposition of the image to be displayed is performed to obtain multi-frame images, including:
  • the image to be displayed is decomposed at the sub-pixel level to obtain a multi-frame image.
  • the method also includes:
  • the image to be displayed is down-sampled to the image to be processed
  • the image to be processed is output at a set position through a pixel position adjustment component.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image in the multi-frame image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in at least h adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed;
  • h is the number of images in the multi-frame images
  • the first image is any image in the multi-frame images
  • the first pixel is any pixel in the first image.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is determined according to the pixel value of the sub-pixel that is the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the set area of the image to be displayed;
  • the geometric center of the set area is the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is obtained by weighting and summing the pixel values of the sub-pixels included in the set area with the same color as the first sub-pixel;
  • the weight of the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the setting area is inversely proportional to the distance between the sub-pixels; the distance between the sub-pixels is the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel and the first sub-pixel The distance between sample locations in the image to be displayed.
  • the display device is a wearable device
  • the size of the set area is related to the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device.
  • the size of the setting area is related to the pixel size of the display component.
  • the size of the setting area is related to the display content of the display component.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
  • q(i, j) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel
  • i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed
  • j represents the ordinate of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed
  • Q(i,j) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 and ⁇ 5 represent the weights respectively.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
  • q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel
  • i represents the abscissa of the pixel point of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • j+1 represents the pixel of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • the ordinate of the point, Q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4 represent the weights, respectively.
  • the multiple frames of images include the first image and the second image
  • controlling the pixel position adjustment component to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time division includes: The multi-frame image is input to the display component, so that the display component displays the multi-frame image in time; the pixel position adjustment component is controlled to output the first image at the first position in the first time unit, and the control
  • the second time unit controls the pixel position adjustment component to output the second image at a second position; the interval between the first position and the second position in the horizontal direction is Px/2; or, the first The distance between the position and the second position in the vertical direction is Py/2; or, the distance between the first position and the second position in the horizontal direction is Px/2 and the distance between the first position and the The interval between the second positions in the vertical direction is Py/2; the first time unit and the second time unit are temporally adjacent.
  • the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization converter and a polarization displacement device; the pixel position adjustment component is controlled to output the first image at the first position in a first time unit, and the second The time unit controls the pixel position adjustment component to output the second image at the second position, including: controlling the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the target polarized light in a time-division manner, and the target polarized light is time-divided by the display component Generated when multiple frames of images are displayed; when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the first polarization direction, the polarization displacement device outputs the target polarized light at the first position, and when the polarization converter outputs When the polarization direction of the target polarized light is the second polarization direction, the polarization displacement device outputs the target polarized light at the second position.
  • the polarization converter is controlled to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light, including:
  • the polarization converter In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output polarization direction of the target polarized light bearing the first image to be the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output target polarization bearing the second image.
  • the polarization direction of the light is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the second position of the output target polarized light bearing the second image are spaced horizontally by Px/2; Px represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the horizontal direction.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in two horizontally adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed;
  • the sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in two horizontally adjacent pixels;
  • the position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
  • the polarization converter is controlled to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light, including:
  • the polarization converter In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output polarization direction of the target polarized light bearing the first image to be the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output target polarization bearing the second image.
  • the polarization direction of the light is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the second position of the output target polarized light bearing the second image are spaced vertically by Py/2; Py represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the vertical direction.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the vertical direction in the image to be displayed;
  • the sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the vertical direction;
  • the position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
  • the polarization converter is controlled to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light, including:
  • the polarization converter In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light bearing the first image to the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the input target polarized light bearing the second image.
  • the polarization direction of is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the output second position of the target polarized light bearing the second image are separated by Py in the vertical direction /2 and offset Px/2 in the horizontal direction, Py represents the vertical distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image, and Px represents the vertical distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image Pitch.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in a diagonal direction in the image to be displayed;
  • the sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the diagonal direction;
  • the position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a display module, including a display component, at least one adjustment component and a control component; the adjustment component includes a polarization rotator and a birefringent device; the display component is used to receive the image to be processed, and display The image to be processed, the resolution of the image to be processed is the same as the resolution of the display component; the polarization rotator is used to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed under the control of the control component; the birefringent device is used to Decomposing the light beam of each pixel included in the image to be processed, outputting the first target polarized light for projecting the first sub-image at the first position and outputting the second target polarized light for projecting the second sub-image at the second position ; Wherein, the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is different from that of the second pixel, the first pixel and the second pixel are two pixels with different polarization directions in the image to be processed, and
  • the polarization rotator is combined with the birefringent device, and the principle of outputting two beams of light by the birefringent device is used to output two sub-images, so that the superposition of the two sub-images is close to the source image to be displayed, improving the display image quality resolution.
  • the position of the first sub-image and the position of the second sub-image are separated by Py/2 in the vertical direction and/or separated by Px/2 in the horizontal direction, where Py represents the distance between pixels in the vertical direction Pitch, Px represents the pixel pitch in the vertical direction.
  • control component is specifically used to control the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beams of the sub-pixels included in each pixel.
  • the image to be processed is obtained by down-sampling the image to be displayed;
  • the control component is specifically configured to: estimate each sub-image to be projected as the first sub-image according to the luminous intensity of each pixel of the image to be displayed The luminous intensity of each pixel and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image; wherein, the resolution of the first sub-image and the second sub-image is the same, and is smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed; according to to be projected as The luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image control the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed.
  • the image to be processed is obtained by down-sampling the image to be displayed; the control component is specifically used to: estimate and adjust the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity to be projected as The luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image is such that the similarity between the adjusted first sub-image and the second sub-image superimposed projected image and the image to be displayed is greater than the set threshold; the set threshold is based on the perception of the human eye.
  • the perception of image difference is determined; according to the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image, the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed direction of polarization.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an imaging control method, the method is applied to a wearable device, the wearable device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component, and the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization rotator and a birefringent device; the method includes: Receive the image to be displayed, perform down-sampling processing on the image to be displayed to obtain the image to be processed, and input the image to be processed to the display component, so that the display component emits target polarized light carrying the image to be displayed, wherein the target frame image is a multi-frame image A frame of image, the resolution of the image to be processed is the same as the resolution of the display component; control the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed, so that the birefringent device includes each pixel in the image to be processed The light beam of the pixel is decomposed, and the first target polarized light for projecting the first sub-image is output at the
  • the first pixel and the second pixel are two pixels with different polarization directions in the image to be processed.
  • the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is that the light beam of the first pixel is projected on the first pixel after decomposition.
  • the ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel of the sub-image to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image, the decomposition ratio of the second pixel is the ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image after the light beam of the second pixel is decomposed and projected on the The luminous intensity scale of the pixels of the second subimage.
  • the position of the first sub-image and the position of the second sub-image are separated by Py/2 in the vertical direction and/or separated by Px/2 in the horizontal direction, where Py represents the distance between pixels in the vertical direction Pitch, Px represents the pixel pitch in the vertical direction.
  • controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes: controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization of the beam of the sub-pixel included in each pixel of the image to be processed direction.
  • controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes: estimating the light beam to be projected as the first sub-image according to the luminous intensity of each pixel of the image to be displayed The luminous intensity of each pixel and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image; wherein, the resolution of the first sub-image and the second sub-image is the same, and is smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed; according to the to-be-projected For the luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image, the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed.
  • controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes: estimating and adjusting the luminous intensity and the to-be-projected luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image is the luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image, so that the similarity between the adjusted first sub-image and the second sub-image superimposed projected image and the image to be displayed is greater than the set threshold; the set threshold is based on the human eye The perception of image difference is determined; according to the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image, the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the luminous intensity of each pixel of the image to be processed The polarization direction of the beam.
  • the present application provides a control device, which is used to implement any one of the methods in the second aspect or the fourth aspect above, and includes corresponding functional modules, respectively used to implement the steps in the above methods.
  • the functions may be implemented by hardware, or may be implemented by executing corresponding software through hardware.
  • Hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
  • the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by a display device, the display device executes the above-mentioned second aspect or the first aspect.
  • the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program or instruction, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by the control device, any possible implementation manner of the above-mentioned second aspect or the fourth aspect can be realized method in .
  • Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of the RGB Stripe arrangement
  • Figure 1B is a schematic diagram of the arrangement of pentile RGBG
  • Fig. 1C is a schematic diagram of delta RGB arrangement
  • Figure 1D is a schematic diagram of the arrangement of pentile RGBW
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of display components in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram of the structure of the display module in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of the structure of the display module in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of the principle of diagonal super-resolution in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 5A is a schematic diagram of realizing resolution enhancement in combination with a polarization grating
  • FIG. 5B is a schematic diagram of image pixel offset to achieve resolution enhancement
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of beam transmission of a display module using a birefringent device in an embodiment of the present application
  • Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of the light output principle of the birefringent device in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 8 is the relationship between the thickness of the birefringent device and the refractive index difference ⁇ n of the o-light and e-light of the birefringent device in the embodiment of the present application;
  • Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the display module in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the concept of sub-pixel sampling in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 11A is a schematic diagram of sample decomposition of an image to be displayed under diagonal super-resolution in the embodiment of the present application;
  • Fig. 11B is a schematic diagram of sample decomposition of the image to be displayed under diagonal super-resolution in the embodiment of the present application;
  • Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of sample decomposition of images to be displayed under vertical super-resolution in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of control timing in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of the beam transmission direction in the display module in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of the overlay display of low-resolution subframes under diagonal super-resolution in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram of sampling and decomposition of an image to be displayed in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram of sampling and decomposition of an image to be displayed in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of low-resolution subframe superposition display in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of the calculation principle of the pixel value of the sub-pixel in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of the calculation principle of the pixel value of the sub-pixel in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 20 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the display module in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Figure 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the display module in the embodiment of the present application.
  • Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram of the polarized light converted and output by the deflection rotator in the embodiment of the present application;
  • Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of the principle of resolution enhancement in the embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 24 is a schematic flow chart of an imaging control method in an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 25 is a schematic flowchart of an imaging control method in an embodiment of the present application.
  • Displaying near the eyes is a display method of AR display devices or VR display devices.
  • Angular resolution can also be referred to as spatial resolution, which refers to the number of pixels filled in an average angle of 1 degree of field of view.
  • the smallest image unit on a display is a pixel.
  • a pixel is composed of three sub-pixels of different colors. Sub-pixels can also be referred to as sub-pixels. For example, a red (R) sub-pixel, a green (G) sub-pixel and a blue (B) sub-pixel form one pixel.
  • the pixel arrangement adopted by the display screen may include RGB stripe arrangement, pentile RGBG arrangement, pentile RGBW arrangement, delta RGB arrangement and the like.
  • FIG. 1A shows RGB Stripe, a commonly used pixel arrangement method for traditional display screens. It is arranged in long strips, and each pixel includes one R, one G, and one B.
  • Figure 1B shows the arrangement of pentile RGBG, each pixel contains two sub-pixels, which alternately appear in the combination of RG and BG.
  • Figure 1C is a delta RGB arrangement, each pixel contains three RGB sub-pixels, and two adjacent pixels have shared sub-pixels, taking row a in Figure 1C as an example, pixel 1 and pixel 2 share a blue sub-pixel , pixel 2 and pixel 3 share the red sub-pixel and the green sub-pixel.
  • Figure 1D is a pentile RGBW arrangement, each pixel includes a red (R) sub-pixel, a green (G) sub-pixel, a blue (B) sub-pixel and a white (W) sub-pixel.
  • the RGB Stripe arrangement three pixels are composed of 9 sub-pixels; in the RGBG arrangement, three pixels are composed of 6 sub-pixels; in the RGB delta arrangement, three pixels are composed of 6 sub-pixels composed of sub-pixels. Therefore, when the number of pixels is the same, the RGBG arrangement and the RGB delta arrangement require fewer sub-pixels than the RGB Stripe arrangement.
  • a display device For example, a terminal device with a display screen, such as a mobile phone, a monitor, a TV, and the like.
  • the display device can also be a wearable device.
  • the wearable device may be a near eye display (near eye display, NED) device, such as VR glasses, or a VR helmet.
  • NED near eye display
  • users wear NED devices to play games, read, watch movies (or TV series), participate in virtual conferences, participate in video education, or video shopping.
  • FIG. 2 it is a schematic structural diagram of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • the display module includes a display component 100 , at least one pixel position adjustment component 200 and a control component 300 .
  • the display module includes a pixel position adjustment component 200 as an example.
  • the display component 100 is used for displaying images.
  • the pixel position adjustment component 200 is configured to adjust the position of the image displayed by the display component 100 .
  • the display device is a wearable device, and the pixel position adjustment component 200 adjusts the imaging of the image displayed by the display component 100 to a position on a virtual image plane at a certain distance from the display component 100 .
  • the display component 100 displays multiple frames of images in time division.
  • the multi-frame images may be obtained by down-sampling the image to be displayed by the control component 300 .
  • the control component 300 splits a high-resolution image to be displayed into multiple low-resolution images.
  • the low resolution image has the same resolution as the display component.
  • the control component 300 sends multiple low-resolution images to the display component 100 in time division for display.
  • the pixel position adjustment component is used to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time division under the control of the control component; wherein, the time when the display component displays the first image is synchronized with the time when the pixel position adjustment component adjusts the first image, the first An image is any image in multiple frames of images.
  • the pixel position adjustment component may be a motor, and the control component 300 controls the mechanical movement of the motor in time division, so as to realize the time division adjustment of the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component.
  • the motor may be an ultrasonic motor or a servo motor or the like.
  • the pixel position adjustment component 200 may include a polarization converter 210 and a polarization displacement device 220 .
  • the polarization converter 210 is configured to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter 210 under the control of the control component 300 , and the target polarized light carries one frame of images among multiple frames of images.
  • the polarization displacement device 220 is used to output the target polarized light at the first position when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter 210 is the first polarization direction, and the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter 210 is In the second polarization direction, the target polarized light is output at the second position; wherein, the display time of the first image is synchronized with the polarization direction adjustment time of the target polarized light carrying the first image, and the first image is any frame of the multi-frame image image.
  • the display module can realize super resolution in the horizontal direction, or super resolution in the vertical direction, or super resolution in the diagonal direction.
  • Horizontal direction super resolution it can be understood that the distance between the two frames of images formed by the beam output by the polarization displacement device in the horizontal direction is Px/2; the Px represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the two frames of images in the horizontal direction, so as to realize The resolution in the horizontal direction is doubled.
  • the polarization shifting device needs to have the ability to realize the shift vector as (Px/2, 0).
  • the distance between the two frames of images output by the polarization displacement device in the vertical direction is Py/2; the Py represents the vertical distance between adjacent pixels of the two frames of images, so as to realize the vertical distance doubled the resolution.
  • the polarization shifting device needs to have the ability to realize the shift vector to be (0, Py/2).
  • Diagonal direction super resolution can be understood as the distance between two frames of images output by the polarization displacement device in the vertical direction is Py/2, and the distance in the horizontal direction is Px/2; thereby doubling the resolution.
  • the polarization shifting device needs to have the ability to realize the shift vector as (Px/2, Py/2).
  • the polarization displacement device can realize the offset of the offset vector as (Px/2, Py/2), then through time division multiplexing In this way, the effect of doubling the equivalent number of display pixels can be achieved.
  • the offset vector of the polarization shifting device is (Px/2,0)
  • the resolution in the horizontal direction can be doubled.
  • the offset vector of the polarization displacement device is (0, Py/2)
  • the resolution in the vertical direction is multiplied.
  • multiple pixel position adjustment components 200 can also be connected in series to realize the offset of multiple frames of images, so as to achieve a resolution increase of more than 2 times.
  • the two pixel position adjustment components are respectively referred to as the first pixel position adjustment component 200a and the second pixel position adjustment component 200b.
  • the polarization converter of the pixel position adjustment component 200a is called a first polarization converter 210a
  • the polarization converter of the pixel position adjustment component 200b is called a second polarization converter 210b.
  • the polarization displacement device in the pixel position adjustment component 200a is called the first polarization displacement device 220a
  • the polarization displacement device in the pixel position adjustment component 200b is called the second polarization displacement device 220b.
  • FIG. 3A and FIG. 3B are respectively introduced and described below to give an exemplary specific implementation solution.
  • the reference numerals of the components in the display module will not be exemplified.
  • the polarization shifting device may be a polarization grating or a birefringent device.
  • the polarization displacement device 220 is a polarization grating as an example.
  • a combination of polarization gratings and polarization modulation devices is used to achieve resolution enhancement.
  • a polarization grating also known as a Pancharatnam-Berry deflector (PBD) is a diffractive optical device.
  • the polarization grating uses the geometric phase to generate a periodic phase grating structure, so that under different incident circularly polarized light, it can generate +1 order and -1 order diffraction in different directions.
  • the polarization state of the light beam output from the display screen is changed by using an electronically controlled polarization modulation device, so that the light beam input into the polarization grating is deflected.
  • P is the distance between two adjacent pixels in the horizontal direction or the distance in the vertical direction.
  • each pixel in the image output by the display screen is shifted diagonally through a polarization converter and a polarization grating Then, by time-sharing displaying the unshifted image and the shifted image, the resolution of the displayed image on the display screen is equivalently increased by 2 times, and the horizontal interval of the shifted pixels is P/2.
  • a combination of a polarization converter and a birefringent element is used to deflect the image-bearing light emitted by the display assembly.
  • the polarization converter can time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light under the control of the control component.
  • Target polarized light is used to carry low-resolution images.
  • the birefringent device when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the first polarization direction, the birefringent device outputs the target polarized light at the first position, and the target polarized light output by the polarization converter has the second polarization direction.
  • the target polarized light is output at the second position, as shown in FIG. 6 .
  • the display component displays the time of the first image, and the polarization converter adjusts the time synchronization for the polarization direction of the target polarized light carrying the first image.
  • the polarization grating is a diffraction device
  • the diffraction device has inherent dispersion characteristics.
  • the deflection angle of the grating is linearly related to the wavelength of the input beam, which leads to the dispersion of the red, green, and blue rays of different wavelengths emitted by the display screen after passing through the polarization grating, resulting in poor imaging effects for the human eye, such as rainbow edge effects,
  • the image seen by the human eye is blurred and the color is distorted.
  • the birefringent device is a non-diffractive device and does not have inherent dispersion characteristics, so the light after passing through the birefringent device will not be dispersed, and the imaging effect is better than that of the polarization grating.
  • the display component may be an ordinary liquid crystal display (liquid crystal display, LCD), an ordinary organic light emitting diode display (organic light emitting diode, OLED) or a silicon-based OLED, or other display devices, which are not specifically limited in this application.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light emitting diode
  • silicon-based OLED silicon-based OLED
  • the polarization switch may be an electronically controlled polarization switch (ECPS).
  • ECPS electronically controlled polarization switch
  • the electronically controlled polarization converter can be nematic liquid crystals (nematic liquid crystals), vertical alignment (vertical alignment, VA) liquid crystals, plate switching (in-plane switching, IPS) liquid crystals, electronically controlled twisted nematic Any of twisted nematic liquid crystals (TNLC), electrically controlled nonlinear crystals or electrically controlled ferroelectric liquid crystals.
  • the control component controls the polarization converter to keep the polarization direction of the input polarized light when it is not powered (that is, OFF), which can be understood as the difference between the input polarized light and the output polarized light
  • the polarization direction is the same, or it is understood that the polarization converter only transmits the input polarized light.
  • the embodiment of this application will only transmit the input polarized light and the output polarized light. The light is considered to be the same polarized light.
  • the control component controls the polarization converter to be powered on, for example, the applied voltage exceeds the threshold voltage Vc, and is used to rotate the polarization direction of the input polarized light, for example, rotate the polarization direction of the input polarized light by 90 degrees.
  • control component controls the polarization converter to be powered on, for example, the applied voltage exceeds a threshold voltage, so as to maintain the polarization direction of the input polarized light.
  • the control component controls the polarization converter to rotate the polarization direction of the input polarized light when it is not powered on, for example, to rotate the polarization direction of the input polarized light by 90 degrees.
  • TNLC is composed of a liquid crystal layer sandwiched between two conductive substrates.
  • the polarization direction of the incident polarized light passing through the TNLC is rotated by 90 degrees; when the voltage applied to the twisted nematic liquid crystal exceeds the threshold voltage Vc, the liquid crystal molecules in the TNLC stand up, and the incident polarized light passing through the TNLC The polarization direction remains unchanged, and the same polarization state as the incident polarized light is still emitted. If the applied voltage is between 0 and Vc, the polarization direction of the incident polarized beam will be rotated by 0-90 degrees after passing through the TNLC, and the specific rotation angle is related to the applied voltage and the specific material of the TNLC.
  • control component can be, for example, a processor, a microprocessor, a controller and other control components, for example, it can be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processing (digital signal processing, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof .
  • CPU central processing unit
  • DSP digital signal processing
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • FIG. 7 it is a schematic diagram of the principle of a birefringent device.
  • the optical axis of the birefringent device lies in-plane, that is, the direction parallel to the plane of the paper.
  • the output light of the birefringent device can be divided into o light and e light.
  • o Light can be called ordinary light
  • the polarization direction is perpendicular to the plane of incidence.
  • e-ray can also be called extraordinary light
  • the polarization direction is located in the plane of incidence.
  • the shift amount is a.
  • the value of the displacement a is related to the specifications of the birefringent device.
  • the value of the displacement a is related to the thickness of the birefringent device and the included angle ⁇ , which is the included angle between the optical axis of the birefringent device and the normal line of the surface of the birefringent device. For example, the displacement a satisfies the conditions shown in the following formula (1):
  • T represents the thickness of the birefringent device
  • n o represents the refractive index of o light
  • ne represents the refractive index of e light.
  • the birefringent device can use crystals, such as quartz crystals, barium borate crystals, quartz crystals, lithium niobate crystals, or titanium dioxide crystals.
  • crystals such as quartz crystals, barium borate crystals, quartz crystals, lithium niobate crystals, or titanium dioxide crystals.
  • the birefringence of the crystal is small, resulting in a larger volume of the VR device or the AR device.
  • liquid crystal can be used as the material of the birefringent device, and the larger birefringence index of the liquid crystal material can be used to make the birefringent device thinner, which can be better placed in a VR device or an AR device with limited space.
  • the liquid crystal material may be a liquid liquid crystal material or a liquid crystal polymer material cured by ultraviolet or heat.
  • the display module may further include a folded optical path, as shown in FIG. 9 , where the polarization shifting device is a birefringent device as an example.
  • the display module sequentially includes a display component, a polarization converter, a birefringent device and a folded optical path according to the beam transmission direction.
  • the folded light path is used to make the light beam output by the birefringent device incident on the human eye.
  • the folded optical path includes a half mirror, a reflective polarizer, one or more imaging lenses and multiple phase films. Phase modes can be used to change the polarization state of incident light.
  • the imaging lens can be a single spherical lens or an aspheric lens, or a combination of multiple spherical or aspheric lenses.
  • the combination of multiple spherical or aspherical lenses can improve the imaging quality of the system and reduce the aberration of the system.
  • the present application may also use an optical path with other structures to make the light beam output by the birefringent device incident on the human eye, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
  • the image to be displayed is decomposed into multiple frames of low-resolution images.
  • the multiple frames of images can be obtained by sub-pixel sampling, that is, each sub-pixel in the pixel unit is regarded as a separate Pixels participate in sampling, and then calculate the sub-pixel pixel value of each pixel in each frame of image to obtain multiple frames of low-resolution images, for example, it can be determined by SPR.
  • sub-pixel sampling When sub-pixel sampling is performed, sub-pixels may be sampled from multiple adjacent pixel points as a sub-pixel of one pixel point.
  • FIG. 10 taking the RGB Stipe arrangement as an example. Taking a slanted line as an example, see (a) in FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the concept of sampling by pixel unit, and (b) in FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the concept of sampling by sub-pixel. In (c) of FIG. 10 , a schematic diagram of sampling is taken as an example of the spacing between red sub-pixels, green sub-pixels and blue sub-pixels. It can be seen from Figure 10 that after using sub-pixel sampling, the oblique lines will be smoother and the jaggedness will be weakened. It should be noted that when the display components adopt different arrangements of sub-pixels, the maximum resolution multiples that can be improved by using the solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application may be different, as shown in Table 1, for example.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in at least h adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed.
  • h represents the number of low-resolution images that need to be decomposed for the image to be displayed.
  • the number of low-resolution images decomposed is 2.
  • the image source (with a resolution of P ⁇ Q) is resampled to obtain the image to be displayed.
  • the resolution of the image to be displayed is 2M ⁇ 2N
  • the resolution of the display component is M ⁇ N (P >M, Q>N)
  • multiple sub-pixels can be collected for each adjacent 4 pixels to form a sub-pixel of a low-resolution image.
  • two frames of low-resolution images include a first image and a second image.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in the 4 adjacent pixels in the image to be displayed; the sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are It is obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in four adjacent pixel points; the position coordinates of the first pixel point in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel point in the second image.
  • the RGB Stipe arrangement Take the RGB Stipe arrangement as an example.
  • the image to be displayed may be decomposed into two images by sub-pixel interval sampling.
  • FIG. 11A For example, referring to Figure 11A, (a) in Figure 11A represents the image to be displayed before sampling, (b) in Figure 11A represents the low-resolution image subframe 1 after sampling, and (c) in Figure 11A represents the low-resolution image after sampling Rate image subframe 2. It can be understood that, the R sub-pixel, the G sub-pixel and the B sub-pixel included in each thickened rectangular box in (b) of FIG. 11A are regarded as a pixel point of a sub-frame 1 . It should be understood that FIG. 11A is only used as an example, and does not specifically limit the sampling manner. For another example, referring to Fig. 11B, (a) in Fig. 11B represents the image to be displayed before sampling, (b) in Fig.
  • FIG. 11B represents the low-resolution image subframe 1 after sampling, and (c) in Fig. 11B represents the low-resolution image after sampling.
  • Resolution image subframe 2 It can be understood that, the R sub-pixel, the G sub-pixel and the B sub-pixel included in each thickened rectangular box in (b) of FIG. 11B are regarded as a pixel point of a sub-frame 1 .
  • the image source when implementing horizontal super-resolution, the image source (with a resolution of P ⁇ Q) is resampled to obtain the image to be displayed.
  • the resolution of the image to be displayed is 2M ⁇ N, and the resolution of the display component is M ⁇ N.
  • a plurality of sub-pixels can be collected for every two horizontally adjacent pixels to form a sub-pixel of a low-resolution image.
  • the resolution increase factor is 2.
  • the image source (with a resolution of P ⁇ Q) is resampled to obtain the image to be displayed.
  • the resolution of the image to be displayed is M ⁇ 2N, and the display component The resolution is M ⁇ N, and multiple sub-pixels can be collected for every 2 adjacent pixels in the vertical direction to form a sub-pixel of a low-resolution image.
  • the image to be displayed can be decomposed into two images by sub-pixel interval sampling. For example, as shown in Figure 12, (a) in Figure 12 represents the image to be displayed before sampling, (b) in Figure 12 represents the low-resolution image subframe 1 after sampling, and (c) in Figure 12 represents the low-resolution image after sampling Rate image subframe 2. It should be understood that Fig. 12 is only used as an example.
  • the number of decomposed low-resolution images is four.
  • the image source (with a resolution of P ⁇ Q) is resampled to obtain the image to be displayed.
  • the resolution of the image to be displayed is 2M ⁇ 2N, and the display component
  • the resolution is M ⁇ N, and multiple sub-pixels can be collected for each adjacent 4 pixels to form pixels of a low-resolution image.
  • the image source may be resampled first to obtain the resolution of the image to be displayed as kM ⁇ LN.
  • k is a positive integer
  • L is a positive integer
  • the resolution of the image source is kM ⁇ LN, that is, the image source is the image to be displayed.
  • the control component obtains the image to be displayed, and then sends the image to be displayed to the display component in time division.
  • the control component After the control component obtains the image source, it processes the image source according to the resolution of the image source and the resolution of the display component to obtain multiple frames of low-resolution images.
  • the image to be displayed can be obtained by a mobile terminal connected to a display device (such as an AR device or a VR device), for example, the mobile terminal obtains the image to be displayed according to the resolution of the image source and the resolution of the display component . Then the mobile terminal sends the image to be displayed to the control component.
  • the image to be displayed may be obtained by a mobile terminal connected to the AR device or VR device, for example, the mobile terminal obtains the image to be displayed according to the resolution of the image source and the resolution of the display component.
  • the mobile terminal decomposes the image to be displayed into multiple frames of low-resolution images, and then sends them to the control component, and sends a control signal to the control component, instructing the display component to display the display signal of multiple frames of low-resolution images.
  • the mobile terminal may be, for example, a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or a personal computer (person computer, PC).
  • the pixel position adjustment component including a polarization converter and a birefringent device as an example, as shown in FIG. 3A and FIG. 3B .
  • the implementation manner is similar to the implementation manner using the polarization converter and the birefringent device, and will not be repeated in this application.
  • the control component or the terminal device may decompose the image to be displayed into two frames of low-resolution images.
  • the implementation of diagonal super-division is taken as an example.
  • the control component synchronously sends modulation signals to the polarization converter, and sends display signals to the display component. For example, at time T0, as shown in FIG. 13 , a high-level AC signal is sent to the polarization converter, and a low-resolution image sub-frame 1 is sent to the display component synchronously.
  • the polarization converter does not convert the polarization direction of the input target polarized light, so that the birefringent device emits O light, that is, does not perform any conversion on the input target beam.
  • Position offset see Figure 13.
  • the control component sends a low-level AC signal to the polarization converter, and synchronously sends the low-resolution image subframe 1 to the display component.
  • the polarization direction of the birefringent device is transformed to make the birefringent device emit e-light, that is, the position of the input target beam is shifted, as shown in FIG. 13 .
  • the image transmitted to the human eye through the optical path is equivalent to the superposition of the low-resolution image subframe 1 and the low-resolution image subframe 2, as shown in FIG. 15 .
  • Each bold black box in Figure 15 represents a pixel.
  • the equivalent resolution of the display component can be increased by 2 times.
  • a higher multiple of resolution can also be achieved, but the combination of multiple sets of polarization converters and birefringent devices is required.
  • Resolution enhancement in horizontal, vertical and arbitrary directions can be achieved by controlling the azimuth angle between the birefringent device and the display assembly.
  • the resolution enhancement algorithm of the present application adopts the time-sharing display of low-resolution images, utilizes the visual persistence and visual synthesis functions of the human eye, and synthesizes high-resolution images in the mind, so the frame rate of the synthesized high-resolution images is relatively low.
  • the maximum frame rate of the display component is reduced by a certain percentage.
  • the structure of the display module is shown in FIG. 3B as an example.
  • the control component or the terminal device may decompose the image to be displayed into 4 frames of low-resolution images.
  • the first pixel position adjustment component and the second pixel position adjustment component are combined to implement horizontal super-resolution, vertical super-resolution and diagonal super-resolution.
  • the resolution of the display element is M ⁇ N. If the resolution of the image source is not 2M ⁇ 2N, the image source may be resampled to obtain the image to be displayed, so that the resolution of the image to be displayed is 2M ⁇ 2N.
  • the image to be displayed When decomposing the image to be displayed, 4 frames of images can be collected by sampling first, and then the pixel value of each pixel in each frame of the image can be further calculated, for example, it can be determined by SPR.
  • the sub-pixel value of a pixel in the frame of image can be obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in 4 adjacent pixels.
  • the image to be displayed is decomposed into 4 frames of images by sub-pixel sampling.
  • FIG. 16A (a) in FIG. 16A represents the image to be displayed before sampling, and (b)-(e) in FIG. 16A represent low-resolution image subframe 1-subframe 4 after sampling.
  • FIG. 16A (a) in FIG. 16A represents the image to be displayed before sampling, and (b)-(e) in FIG. 16A represent low-resolution image subframe 1-subframe 4 after sampling.
  • FIG. 16A is only an example, and does not specifically limit the specific sampling manner.
  • FIG. 16B (a) in FIG. 16B represents the image to be displayed before sampling, and (b)-(e) in FIG. 16B represent low-resolution image subframe 1-subframe 4 after sampling.
  • FIG. 16B is only used as an example, and does not specifically limit the specific sampling manner.
  • the O optical axis of the second birefringent device coincides with the O optical axis of the first birefringent device, and the e optical axis of the second birefringent device is perpendicular to the e optical axis of the first birefringent device.
  • Table 2 When the polarization converter is OFF, the polarization converter does not convert the polarization direction of the input target polarized light, so that the birefringent device emits O light, that is, does not shift the position of the input target beam.
  • the polarization converter When the polarization converter is turned ON, the polarization converter converts the polarization direction of the target polarized light of the input pair, so that the birefringent device emits e-light.
  • the first birefringent device When the first birefringent device emits e-ray, it shifts the target beam horizontally, and when the second birefringent device emits e-ray, it shifts the target beam vertically. See Table 2.
  • the control component controls the display component to display subframe 1, controls the first polarization converter to be in an ON state, and controls the second polarization converter to be in an OFF state.
  • the control component controls the display component to start displaying subframe 1, and sends high-level modulation signals to the first polarization converter and the second polarization converter. Therefore, the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 1 does not shift after passing through the first birefringent device and the second birefringent device.
  • the control component controls the display component to display the subframe 2, controls the first polarization converter to be in the OFF state, and controls the second polarization converter to be in the ON state.
  • the control component controls the display component to start displaying subframe 2, sends a low-level modulation signal to the first polarization converter, and sends a high-level modulation signal to the second polarization converter. Therefore, the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 2 is shifted horizontally after passing through the first birefringent device, and the beam does not continue to shift after passing through the second birefringent device. It can be understood that the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 2 is shifted horizontally after passing through the first birefringent device and the second birefringent device.
  • the control component controls the display component to display the subframe 3 , controls the first polarization converter to be in the ON state, and controls the second polarization converter to be in the OFF state.
  • the control component controls the display component to start displaying subframe 3, sends a high-level modulation signal to the first polarization converter, and sends a low-level modulation signal to the second polarization converter. Therefore, the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 3 passes through the first birefringent device without beam shift, and then passes through the second birefringent device and then undergoes a vertical shift of the beam.
  • the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 3 is vertically shifted after passing through the first birefringent device and the second birefringent device.
  • the control component controls the display component to display the subframe 4, controls the first polarization converter to be in the OFF state, and controls the second polarization converter to be in the OFF state.
  • the control component controls the display component to start displaying subframe 4, sends a high-level modulation signal to the first polarization converter, and sends a high-level modulation signal to the second polarization converter.
  • the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 4 is horizontally shifted through the first birefringent device, and then continues to be vertically shifted after passing through the second birefringent device. It can be understood that the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 4 is diagonally shifted after passing through the first birefringent device and the second birefringent device.
  • the image transmitted to the human eye through the optical path is equivalent to the superimposition of the low-resolution image subframe 1-low-resolution image subframe 4, as shown in FIG. 17 .
  • the 4 low-resolution image subframes of the size above the arrow are superimposed to obtain the effect below the arrow. It can be seen that the resolution has been increased by a factor of 4.
  • the equivalent resolution of the display component can be increased by 4 times.
  • the resolution enhancement algorithm of the present application adopts the time-sharing display of low-resolution images, utilizes the visual persistence and visual synthesis functions of the human eye, and synthesizes high-resolution images in the mind, so the frame rate of the synthesized high-resolution images is relatively low.
  • the maximum frame rate of the display component is reduced by a certain percentage.
  • the embodiment of the present application uses a sub-pixel level decomposition method to split the image to be displayed. After sub-pixel sampling is used, the edge will be smoother and the jaggedness will be weakened, but there may be color fringe problems. Based on this, in order to weaken the color fringing, the embodiment of the present application provides a sub pixel rendering (sub pixel rendering, SPR) method to sample the pixel value of each sub pixel.
  • SPR sub pixel rendering
  • the pixel value of the set color sub-pixel of the pixel (i, j) may be weighted and determined according to the pixel value of the set color sub-pixel of the pixel (i, j) and the set color sub-pixels of surrounding pixels.
  • the weight of the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the setting area is inversely proportional to the distance between the sub-pixels; the distance between the sub-pixels is the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel and the first The distance between subpixel sampling locations in the image to be displayed.
  • the size of the set area is related to the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device. For example, the greater the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device, the greater the size of the set area. It can be understood that the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device is inversely proportional to the size of the set area.
  • the size of the setting area is related to the pixel size of the display component. The size of the setting area can be configured according to the pixel size of the display component. In some other embodiments, the size of the setting area is related to the display content of the display component. For example, the size of the setting area can be adaptively adjusted according to the display content of the display component.
  • the size of the setting area may be adaptively adjusted according to the scene to which the image displayed by the display component belongs. For example, compared with the grassland scene, the setting area corresponding to the task scene is larger than the setting area corresponding to the grassland scene.
  • the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the sampled pixel point can be determined by the following formula, taking the first sub-pixel as an example:
  • q(i, j) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel
  • i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel of the image to be displayed
  • j represents the pixel of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • Q(i,j) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 and ⁇ 5 represent the weights respectively.
  • the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the sampled pixel point can be determined by the following formula, taking the first sub-pixel as an example:
  • q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel
  • i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed
  • j+1 represents the first sub-pixel in the to-be-displayed image.
  • the ordinate of the pixel point of the displayed image, Q(i,j+1) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4 denote weights, respectively.
  • the pixel value g(i,j) of the green sub-pixel in the pixel at position (i,j) can be determined by the position (i-2,j) , (i-1, j-1), (i, j-2), (i+1, j-1), (i+2, j), (i+1, j+1), (i- 1, j+1), (i, j+2) green sub-pixels composed of green G components in the diamond-shaped pixels to jointly determine.
  • the green sub-pixels whose area of the pixel is not greater than 50% within the rhombic range do not participate in the determination.
  • the green sub-pixel at position (i,j) is composed of positions (i,j), (i-1,j), (i,j-1), (i+1,j), (i,j+ 1)
  • the weighted determination of the pixel values of the green sub-pixels among the five pixels is obtained.
  • g(i,j) ⁇ 1 *G(i-1,j)+ ⁇ 2 *G(i,j-1)+ ⁇ 3 *G(i+1,j)+ ⁇ 4 * G(i,j+1)+ ⁇ 5 *G(i,j).
  • the pixel value r(i, j+1) of the red sub-pixel in the pixel at position (i, j+1) can be determined by the position (i-2, j+1), (i-1, j), (i,j-1), (i+1,j), (i+2,j+1), (i+1,j+2), (i,j+3), (i- 1, j+1) red sub-pixels composed of red R components in the diamond-shaped pixels to jointly determine.
  • the red sub-pixels whose area of the pixel is not more than 50% within the rhombic range do not participate in the determination.
  • the red sub-pixel at position (i, j+1) is composed of positions (i-1, j), (i, j-1), (i+1, j), (i, j+1), (i, j+1), (i, j+2) is obtained.
  • eight pixels can be divided into two categories, the red sub-pixels in the upper, lower, left and right four pixels around the position (i, j+1) are used as the second category, and the red sub-pixels in the remaining pixels are Sub-pixel as the first category.
  • the weight distribution ratio of the two types of sub-pixels is 0.5:0.5.
  • the pixel value r(i,j+1) of the red sub-pixel at position (i,j+1) can be determined as follows:
  • r(i,j+1) ⁇ 1 *R(i-1,j)+ ⁇ 2 *R(i,j-1)+ ⁇ 3 *R(i+1,j)+ ⁇ 4 *R( i,j+1)
  • the weights corresponding to the 8 sub-pixels can be determined by the distances between the geometric center of the pixel where the 8 sub-pixels are located and the red sub-pixel in position (i, j+1). Take a sub-pixel aspect ratio of 1:3 as an example.
  • weights corresponding to the eight sub-pixels are respectively determined by the following formulas:
  • the second category is a first category:
  • x represents the relationship between the ratio of the pixel value allocated for calculating the red sub-pixel and the distance; x ⁇ 0.
  • the pixel value and its own pixel value are determined by weighting.
  • the weights corresponding to the 8 sub-pixels involved in the determination of the pixel value of the red sub-pixel of (i, j+1) as can be seen in Figure 19, the black solid dot represents the red sub-pixel of (i, j+1) , the black dashed hollow dots represent the center positions of the 8 pixels of the pixel values of the red sub-pixels of (i,j+1).
  • the weight can be determined according to the distance between the black dotted hollow dots and the black solid dots.
  • the method of determining the pixel value b(i, j) of the blue sub-pixel at position (i, j+1) in the SPR process can be obtained.
  • the present application supports the display module to work in two working modes.
  • Super resolution mode and normal mode.
  • the control component determines that the super-resolution mode is enabled, it performs super-resolution processing, and when it determines that the normal mode is enabled, the resolution remains unchanged and the frame rate does not decrease.
  • TNLC uniformly keeps the polarization mode of the target polarized light unchanged (or uniformly changes the polarization direction by 90 degrees).
  • the control component can resample the image source to the resolution of the display component, and directly output to the display component. This normal mode can be applied to some high frame rate scenarios, such as games.
  • another display module which realizes super-resolution through a polarization converter and a birefringent device.
  • the display module includes a display component 2301 , a deflection rotator 2302 , a birefringent device 2303 and a control component 2304 .
  • the display component 2301, the polarization rotator 2302 and the birefringent device 2303 are placed in sequence along the transmission direction of the optical path.
  • the display module further includes a folding optical path 2305 .
  • the display component 2301 is used to display images.
  • the polarization rotator 2302 can modulate the polarization direction of the incident ray polarized light according to the magnitude of the voltage signal applied to it, so that it can achieve polarization rotation at any angle, and can achieve pixel or sub-pixel level through the array transistor on the polarization rotator 2302 separate control.
  • the display component 2301 displays the image to be displayed. Wherein, the resolution of the image to be processed is the same as that of the display component.
  • the polarization rotator 2302 adjusts the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel (or each sub-pixel in the pixel) of the image to be processed under the control of the control component 2304 , and outputs it to the birefringent device 2303 .
  • the birefringent device 2303 decomposes the light beam of each pixel included in the image to be processed, outputs the first target polarized light for projecting the first sub-image at the first position and outputs the first polarized light for projecting the second sub-image at the second position.
  • Two target polarized light The polarization directions of the input polarized light at different pixel positions may be different, and the decomposition ratios of two pixels with different polarization directions are also different.
  • the output light of the birefringent device can be divided into o light and e light.
  • o Light can be called ordinary light, the polarization direction is perpendicular to the plane of incidence.
  • e-ray can also be called extraordinary light, and the polarization direction is located in the plane of incidence.
  • the birefringent device only outputs o-light when a beam of a certain polarization direction is input, and only outputs e-light when a beam of another polarization direction is input. In the remaining polarization directions, both o-light and e-light are output.
  • the embodiment of the present application uses this principle to input target polarized light with different polarization directions into the birefringent device for different pixel or sub-pixel positions, so that the pixels at two positions output by the birefringent device 2303 are superimposed and correspond to the image to be displayed
  • the pixel values of the pixels at the locations are approximately the same or infinitely close.
  • the first pixel and the second pixel are two pixels with different polarization directions in the image to be processed.
  • the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is different from that of the second pixel.
  • the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is that the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image after the beam of the first pixel is decomposed is the same as that of the pixel projected on the second sub-image.
  • the ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel of the second pixel, the decomposition ratio of the second pixel is the ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image after the light beam of the second pixel is decomposed.
  • the polarization rotator 2302 may be a twisted nematic polarization rotator (TNPR), an in-Plane switching polarization rotator (IPSPR), a cholesteric liquid crystal (cholesteric liquid crystals, CLC) and 1/4 Any of wave plate combination, TNLC with thin film transistor (thin film transistor, TFT) circuit, etc.
  • TNPR twisted nematic polarization rotator
  • IPSPR in-Plane switching polarization rotator
  • CLC cholesteric liquid crystals
  • TFT thin film transistor
  • the TNLC with TFT is composed of a liquid crystal layer sandwiched between two conductive substrates.
  • the voltage applied to the TNLC with TFT is between 0 and Vc
  • the polarization direction of the incident polarized beam will be rotated by 0 to 90 degrees after passing through the TNLC.
  • the specific rotation angle is related to the applied voltage and the specific material of the TNLC.
  • the display component 2301 can be an ordinary liquid crystal display (LCD), OLED, or a more advanced micro-LED display, wherein the OLED display has higher luminous efficiency and higher contrast ratio; the mini-LED display has more High luminous brightness, can be applied to scenes that require stronger luminous brightness.
  • LCD liquid crystal display
  • OLED organic light-emitting diode
  • mini-LED display has more High luminous brightness, can be applied to scenes that require stronger luminous brightness.
  • control component 2304 can be, for example, a processor, a microprocessor, a controller and other control components, for example, it can be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processing (digital signal processing, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuits, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any other combination.
  • CPU central processing unit
  • DSP digital signal processing
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA field programmable gate array
  • the birefringent device can use crystals, such as quartz crystals, barium borate crystals, quartz crystals, lithium niobate crystals, or titanium dioxide crystals. Generally speaking, the birefringence of the crystal is small, resulting in a larger volume of the VR device or the AR device.
  • liquid crystal can be used as the material of the birefringent device, and the larger birefringence index of the liquid crystal material can be used to make the birefringent device thinner, which can be better placed in a VR device or an AR device with limited space.
  • the liquid crystal material may be a liquid liquid crystal material or a liquid crystal polymer material cured by ultraviolet or heat.
  • the birefringent device 2303 uses liquid crystal polymer RM 257. After surface orientation or electric field orientation, the angle between the director of the liquid crystal molecules and the surface is ⁇ 45 degrees, and then the liquid crystal polymer is formed through ultraviolet curing.
  • each device in the display module will not be numbered as an example.
  • the voltage signal applied to the polarization rotator is controlled by the control component, and the polarization rotator Vertical linearly polarized light can be rotated into linearly polarized light at any angle. Since the polarization rotator can realize sub-pixel level control, the polarization directions of each pixel or even each sub-pixel in the display component are not completely consistent after passing through the polarization rotator.
  • the light beam reaches the birefringent device after passing through the polarization rotator, and is divided into two beams by the birefringent device, o light and e light.
  • the intensity ratio of the two beams is determined by the polarization direction or polarization angle of the incident light, as shown in Figure 22.
  • a beam of light will be divided into two beams after passing through the birefringent device, and the two beams of light correspond to two images, which are the first sub-image and the second sub-image respectively.
  • the birefringent device arranged in the display module the position of the first sub-image and the position of the second sub-image are separated by Py/2 in the vertical direction and/or Px/2 in the horizontal direction, the Py represents the pitch of the pixels in the vertical direction, and the Px represents the pitch of the pixels in the horizontal direction.
  • the human eye's persistence of vision and visual synthesis function are used to synthesize a high-resolution image in the mind, so the frame rate of the synthesized high-resolution image is reduced, but the resolution will be reduced. improve.
  • control component can estimate and adjust the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image, so that the adjusted first sub-image
  • the similarity between the image and the image to be displayed after superimposing and projecting the second sub-image is greater than a set threshold, or in other words, the image after superimposing and projecting is substantially the same as the image to be displayed.
  • the set threshold is determined according to human eyes' ability to perceive image differences.
  • the control component can control the polarization rotator to adjust the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed according to the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image direction of polarization.
  • different polarization directions correspond to the distribution ratios of the output luminous intensity of the o-light and e-light. Therefore, after the luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the second sub-image, and further according to the corresponding relationship, the polarization direction of the input light beam corresponding to each pixel can be determined.
  • different polarization directions correspond to different applied voltages, so that the control component can apply a corresponding applied voltage to each pixel or sub-pixel according to the applied voltage corresponding to the polarization direction.
  • the voltage signal strength of each pixel (or sub-pixel) on the deflection rotator and the content of the display component can be obtained by the following optimization formula (1):
  • S is a column vector composed of all pixel values of the target image
  • R is a high-resolution image synthesized by the low-resolution first sub-image V1 composed of o-light and the low-resolution second sub-image V2 composed of e-light , which can be understood as the actual displayed image.
  • the column vectors obtained by the arrangement of each pixel or sub-pixel in R are similar to the arrangement of the column vectors obtained by the arrangement of each pixel or sub-pixel in S.
  • M is a mapping matrix that maps the first sub-image V1 and the second sub-image V2 to R.
  • the image to be processed after passing through the birefringent device is decomposed into a first sub-image (o-photon frame V1) and a second sub-image (e-photon-frame V2 ).
  • the image synthesized by the first sub-image and the second sub-image is shown in FIG.
  • the pixel 6 is synthesized, so refer to the mapping matrix M, the ninth row in the mapping matrix M, except the 2nd element and the P+6th element are 1, other elements are 0 (wherein P is the pixel of the subframe total).
  • mapping matrix M is as follows:
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides an imaging control method, which is applied to a wearable device.
  • the wearable device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component, and the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization converter and a birefringence device.
  • the display device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component.
  • the display component includes a plurality of pixels, and each pixel of the plurality of pixels includes a plurality of sub-pixels.
  • the time when the display component displays the first image is synchronized with the time when the pixel position adjustment component adjusts the first image, and the first image is any one of the multiple frames of images.
  • the display device supports two modes, super resolution mode or normal mode.
  • the image to be displayed is decomposed at the sub-pixel level to obtain a multi-frame image.
  • the image to be displayed is down-sampled to an image to be processed; the image to be processed is input to the display component, so that the display component displays An image to be processed; the pixel position adjustment component is used to output the image to be processed at a set position.
  • the polarization converter no longer adjusts the switch state, that is, the polarization direction of the output target polarized light that needs to be controlled no longer needs to be adjusted.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image of the multi-frame images are obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in at least h adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed.
  • h is the number of images in the multi-frame images
  • the first image is any image in the multi-frame images
  • the first pixel is any pixel in the first image.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is determined according to the pixel value of the sub-pixel that is the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the set area of the image to be displayed;
  • the geometric center of the set area is the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is obtained by weighting and summing the pixel values of the sub-pixels included in the set area with the same color as the first sub-pixel;
  • the weight of the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the setting area is inversely proportional to the distance between the sub-pixels; the distance between the sub-pixels is the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel and the first sub-pixel The distance between sample locations in the image to be displayed.
  • the display device is a wearable device
  • the size of the set area is related to the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device.
  • the size of the setting area is related to the pixel size of the display component.
  • the size of the setting area is related to the display content of the display component.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
  • q(i, j) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel
  • i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed
  • j represents the ordinate of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed
  • Q(i,j) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 and ⁇ 5 represent the weights respectively.
  • the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
  • q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel
  • i represents the abscissa of the pixel point of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • j+1 represents the pixel of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • the ordinate of the point, Q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed
  • ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 , ⁇ 4 , ⁇ 1 , ⁇ 2 , ⁇ 3 and ⁇ 4 represent the weights, respectively.
  • the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization converter and a polarization shifting device
  • Controlling the pixel position adjustment component to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time division includes: inputting multiple frames of images to the display component in time division, so that the display component emits target polarized light in time division, wherein the target polarized light is used to carry multiple Each frame of image in the frame image; control the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light in time division, so that when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the first polarization direction, the polarization displacement device is in the first position Outputting the target polarized light, when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the second polarization direction, the polarization displacement device outputs the target polarized light at the second position.
  • the multiple frames of images include a first image and a second image
  • Control the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light in time division including:
  • the polarization converter In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output polarization direction of the target polarized light bearing the first image to be the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output target polarization bearing the second image.
  • the polarization direction of the light is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the second position of the output target polarized light bearing the second image are spaced horizontally by Px/2; Px represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the horizontal direction.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in two horizontally adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed;
  • the sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in two horizontally adjacent pixels;
  • the position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
  • the multiple frames of images include a first image and a second image
  • Control the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light in time division including:
  • the polarization converter In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output polarization direction of the target polarized light bearing the first image to be the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output target polarization bearing the second image.
  • the polarization direction of the light is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the second position of the output target polarized light bearing the second image are spaced vertically by Py/2; Py represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the vertical direction.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the vertical direction in the image to be displayed;
  • the sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the vertical direction;
  • the position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
  • the multiple frames of images include a first image and a second image
  • Control the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light in time division including:
  • the polarization converter In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light bearing the first image to the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the input target polarized light bearing the second image.
  • the polarization direction of is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the output second position of the target polarized light bearing the second image are separated by Py in the vertical direction /2 and offset Px/2 in the horizontal direction, Py represents the vertical distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image, and Px represents the vertical distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image Pitch.
  • the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in a diagonal direction in the image to be displayed;
  • the sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the diagonal direction;
  • the position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
  • the embodiment of the present application also provides another imaging control method, which is applied to a wearable device.
  • the wearable device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component, and the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization rotator and a birefringent device.
  • FIG. 25 it is a schematic flowchart of a possible imaging control method.
  • the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is different from that of the second pixel, the first pixel and the second pixel are two pixels with different polarization directions in the image to be processed, and the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is that the light beam of the first pixel passes through
  • the ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image after decomposition to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image, the decomposition ratio of the second pixel is the pixel projected on the first sub-image after the light beam of the second pixel is decomposed
  • the luminous intensity is proportional to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image.
  • the position of the first sub-image and the position of the second sub-image are separated by Py/2 in the vertical direction and/or Px/2 in the horizontal direction, where Py represents the distance between pixels in the vertical direction, and Px Indicates the pixel spacing in the vertical direction.
  • controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes:
  • the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the light beams of the sub-pixels included in each pixel of the image to be processed.
  • controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes:
  • the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed.
  • controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes:
  • the similarity between the image and the image to be displayed is greater than a set threshold; the set threshold is determined according to the human eye's ability to perceive image differences;
  • the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed.
  • the method steps in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by means of hardware, or may be implemented by means of a processor executing software instructions.
  • Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and software modules can be stored in random access memory (random access memory, RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM) , PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM), register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or known in the art any other form of storage medium.
  • An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor such the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium.
  • the storage medium may also be a component of the processor.
  • the processor and storage medium can be located in the ASIC.
  • the ASIC may be located in a head-mounted display device or a terminal device.
  • the processor and the storage medium may also exist in the head-mounted display device or the terminal device as discrete components.
  • all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof.
  • software When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product.
  • the computer program product comprises one or more computer programs or instructions. When the computer program or instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are executed in whole or in part.
  • the computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment, or other programmable devices.
  • the computer program or instructions can be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer program or instructions can be downloaded from a website, computer, A server or data center transmits to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired or wireless means.
  • the computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrating one or more available media. Described usable medium can be magnetic medium, for example, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape; It can also be optical medium, for example, digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD); It can also be semiconductor medium, for example, solid state drive (solid state drive) , SSD).
  • At least one means one or more, and “multiple” means two or more.
  • “And/or” describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural.
  • “At least one of the following” or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items.
  • at least one item (piece) of a, b or c can mean: a, b, c, "a and b", “a and c", “b and c", or "a and b and c ", where a, b, c can be single or multiple.
  • the character “/” generally indicates that the contextual objects are an “or” relationship. In the formulas of this application, the character “/” indicates that the front and back related objects are in a “division” relationship.
  • the symbol “(a, b)” means an open interval, the range is greater than a and less than b; "[a, b]” means a closed interval, the range is greater than or equal to a and less than or equal to b; "(a , b]” means a half-open and half-closed interval, the range is greater than a and less than or equal to b; “(a, b]” means a half-open and half-closed interval, the range is greater than a and less than or equal to b.
  • exemplary is used to mean an example, illustration, or illustration. Any embodiment or design described in this application as “exemplary” should not be construed as preferred or more preferred than other embodiments or designs. Or it can be understood that the use of the word example is intended to present a concept in a specific manner, and does not constitute a limitation to the application.

Abstract

A display module and an imaging control method, which are used for providing a super-resolution scheme for a display device. The method comprises: a control component (300) performing sub-pixel-level decomposition on a high-resolution image, so as to obtain a plurality of frames of low-resolution images; then, displaying the low-resolution images by means of a display component (100) in a time-division manner; and then controlling, in the time-division manner, a pixel position adjustment component (200) to adjust the position of each frame of image which is displayed by the display component (100), that is, displaying the plurality of frames of low-resolution images in the time-division manner. The plurality of frames of low-resolution images are superimposed in human eyes by using visual persistence and visual synthesis functions of the human eyes, such that the human eyes see high-resolution images, and the sawtooth feeling is reduced by means of the sub-pixel-level decomposition, such that the imaging effect is improved.

Description

一种显示模组及成像控制方法A display module and imaging control method
相关申请的交叉引用Cross References to Related Applications
本申请要求在2021年9月30日提交中华人民共和国知识产权局、申请号为202111164540.X、发明名称为“一种显示模组及成像控制方法”的中国专利申请的优先权,其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。This application claims the priority of the Chinese patent application submitted to the Intellectual Property Office of the People's Republic of China on September 30, 2021, with the application number 202111164540.X and the title of the invention "A Display Module and Imaging Control Method", the entire content of which Incorporated in this application by reference.
技术领域technical field
本申请实施例涉及光学技术领域,尤其涉及一种显示模组及成像控制方法。The embodiments of the present application relate to the field of optical technologies, and in particular, to a display module and an imaging control method.
背景技术Background technique
显示设备,比如虚拟现实(virtual reality,VR)设备,通过满足较大的视场角(angle of view,FOV)和高分辨率来实现深度的沉浸感。目前采用的VR设备中观看的内容仅达到10-20角分辨率(points per degree,PPD),无法满足人眼1’(60PPD)的分辨率极限,使得用户看到的图像存在纱窗效应。为了解决VR设备的纱窗效应,一方面,可以利用高分辨率的显示屏,但是为了达到VR设备对尺寸的需求,要采用硅基有机电激光显示(micro organic light-emitting diode,micro-OLED)技术的显示屏,但是高分辨率的micro–OLED成本较高。另一方面,可以通过分辨率增强技术间接提升显示屏的分辨率,但是目前没有一种可行的应用于显示设备的分辨率增强方案。Display devices, such as virtual reality (VR) devices, achieve deep immersion by satisfying a large angle of view (angle of view, FOV) and high resolution. The content viewed in the currently used VR devices only reaches 10-20 points per degree (PPD), which cannot meet the resolution limit of 1’ (60PPD) of the human eye, so that the image seen by the user has a screen door effect. In order to solve the screen window effect of VR devices, on the one hand, high-resolution display screens can be used, but in order to meet the size requirements of VR devices, silicon-based organic light-emitting diodes (micro-OLED) must be used technology display, but the high-resolution micro-OLED costs more. On the other hand, the resolution of the display screen can be indirectly improved through a resolution enhancement technology, but currently there is no feasible resolution enhancement solution applied to a display device.
发明内容Contents of the invention
本申请实施例提供一种显示模组及成像控制方法,用以提供一种应用于VR设备的分辨率的增强方案。Embodiments of the present application provide a display module and an imaging control method, which are used to provide a resolution enhancement solution applied to a VR device.
第一方面,本申请实施例提供一种显示模组,包括显示组件、像素位置调整组件和控制组件,显示组件包括多个像素,多个像素中每个像素包括多个亚像素;显示组件,用于在控制组件的控制下分时显示多帧图像;多帧图像是对待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到的,多帧图像的分辨率与显示组件的分辨率相同,多帧图像的分辨率小于待显示图像的分辨率;像素位置调整组件,用于在控制组件的控制下分时调整显示组件显示的每帧图像的位置;其中,显示组件显示第一图像的时间与像素位置调整组件调整第一图像的时间同步,第一图像为多帧图像中任一图像。通过上述方式多帧低分辨率图像分时显示,利用人眼的视觉暂留和视觉合成功能,使得人眼看到的高分辨率的图像。通过亚像素级采样方式对待显示图像进行分解提高边缘的平滑度,降低锯齿感。In the first aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides a display module, including a display component, a pixel position adjustment component, and a control component. The display component includes a plurality of pixels, and each pixel in the plurality of pixels includes a plurality of sub-pixels; the display component, It is used to display multi-frame images in time under the control of the control component; multi-frame images are obtained by sub-pixel decomposition of the image to be displayed, and the resolution of the multi-frame images is the same as that of the display component, and the resolution of the multi-frame images Smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed; the pixel position adjustment component is used to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time division under the control of the control component; wherein, the time when the display component displays the first image is adjusted with the pixel position adjustment component Time synchronization of the first image, where the first image is any image in multiple frames of images. Through the time-sharing display of multiple frames of low-resolution images in the above manner, the human eyes can see high-resolution images by using the persistence of vision and visual synthesis functions of the human eyes. Decompose the image to be displayed by sub-pixel sampling to improve the smoothness of the edge and reduce the jaggedness.
在一种可能的设计中,像素位置调整组件包括偏振转换器和偏振位移器件;偏振转换器,用于在控制组件的控制下分时调整偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向,目标偏振光承载多帧图像中的一帧图像;偏振位移器件,用于在偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向时,在第一位置输出目标偏振光,在偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向时,在第二位置输出目标偏振光。In a possible design, the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization converter and a polarization displacement device; the polarization converter is used to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter under the control of the control component, and the target polarization The light bears one frame of images in multiple frames of images; the polarization displacement device is used to output the target polarized light at the first position when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the first polarization direction, and output the target polarized light at the polarization converter output When the polarization direction of the target polarized light is the second polarization direction, the target polarized light is output at the second position.
在一种可能的设计中,控制组件,具体用于接收待显示图像,并对待显示图像进行亚 像素级分解得到多帧图像,并分时将多帧图像发送给显示组件。In a possible design, the control component is specifically used to receive the image to be displayed, decompose the image to be displayed at sub-pixel level to obtain multiple frames of images, and send the multiple frames of images to the display component in time division.
在一种可能的设计中,偏振位移器件为双折射器件或者偏振光栅。采用双折射器件是非衍射器件,不具有固有的色散特性,从而经过双折射器件后的光线不会发生色散,进一步提高成像效果。In a possible design, the polarization shifting device is a birefringent device or a polarization grating. The birefringent device is a non-diffractive device and does not have inherent dispersion characteristics, so that the light after passing through the birefringent device will not be dispersed, further improving the imaging effect.
在一种可能的设计中,偏振转换器包括扭曲向列向液晶或者面内旋转液晶;或者偏振转换器包括胆甾相液晶和1/4波片。In one possible design, the polarization converter includes twisted nematic liquid crystals or in-plane spun liquid crystals; or the polarization converter includes cholesteric liquid crystals and 1/4 wave plates.
在一种可能的设计中,像素位置调整组件为马达。In one possible design, the pixel position adjustment component is a motor.
在一种可能的设计中,多帧图像中的第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从待显示图像包括的相邻的至少h个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;其中,h为多帧图像的图像数量,第一图像为多帧图像中的任一图像,第一像素点是第一图像中的任一像素点。In a possible design, the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image in the multi-frame image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in at least h adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed; Wherein, h is the number of images in the multi-frame images, the first image is any image in the multi-frame images, and the first pixel is any pixel in the first image.
在一种可能的设计中,第一像素点中包括的第一亚像素的像素值是根据待显示图像的设定区域包括的与第一亚像素的颜色相同的亚像素的像素值确定的;设定区域的几何中心为第一亚像素在待显示图像中的采样位置。In a possible design, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is determined according to the pixel value of the sub-pixel that is the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the set area of the image to be displayed; The geometric center of the set area is the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed.
上述设计中,通过采样位置周围的相同颜色的亚像素值来确定采样位置的亚像素值,可以减少显示图像周围色边的出现。一些实施例中,也可以仅针对四周设定范围内的亚像素值确定时采用该方式。In the above design, the sub-pixel value of the sampling position is determined by the sub-pixel value of the same color around the sampling position, which can reduce the occurrence of color fringes around the displayed image. In some embodiments, this method may also be used only for the determination of sub-pixel values within a set range of four weeks.
在一种可能的设计中,第一像素点中包括的第一亚像素的像素值是对设定区域包括的与第一亚像素的颜色相同的亚像素的像素值进行加权求和得到;In a possible design, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is obtained by weighting and summing the pixel values of the sub-pixels included in the set area with the same color as the first sub-pixel;
其中,设定区域包括的与第一亚像素颜色相同的亚像素的权重与亚像素之间距离成反比;亚像素之间距离为与第一亚像素颜色相同的亚像素和第一亚像素在待显示图像中的采样位置之间的距离。Wherein, the weight of the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the setting area is inversely proportional to the distance between the sub-pixels; The distance between sample locations in the image to be displayed.
在一种可能的设计中,第一亚像素的像素值满足如下公式所示的条件:In a possible design, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
q(i,j)=α 1*Q(i-1,j)+α 2*Q(i,j-1)+α 3*Q(i+1,j)+α 4*Q(i,j+1)+α 5*Q(i,j); q(i,j)=α 1 *Q(i-1,j)+α 2 *Q(i,j-1)+α 3 *Q(i+1,j)+α 4 *Q(i, j+1)+α 5 *Q(i,j);
其中,q(i,j)表示第一亚像素的像素值;i表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的横坐标;j表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的纵坐标;Q(i,j)表示第一亚像素在待显示图像中采样位置的亚像素的像素值;α 1,α 2,α 3,α 4和α 5分别表示权重。 Among them, q(i, j) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel; i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed; j represents the ordinate of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed ; Q(i,j) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed; α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 and α 5 represent the weights respectively.
在一种可能的设计中,第一亚像素的像素值满足如下公式所示的条件:In a possible design, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
q(i,j+1)=α 1*Q(i-1,j)+α 2*Q(i,j-1)+α 3*Q(i+1,j)+α 4*Q(i,j+1) q(i,j+1)=α 1 *Q(i-1,j)+α 2 *Q(i,j-1)+α 3 *Q(i+1,j)+α 4 *Q( i,j+1)
1*Q(i-1,j+1)+β 2*Q(i,j)+β 3*Q(i+1,j+1)+β 4*Q(i,j+2)。 1 *Q(i-1,j+1)+β 2 *Q(i,j)+β 3 *Q(i+1,j+1)+β 4 *Q(i,j+2) .
其中,q(i,j+1)表示第一亚像素的像素值,i表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的横坐标,j+1表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的纵坐标,Q(i,j+1)表示第一亚像素在待显示图像中采样位置的亚像素的像素值,α 1,α 2,α 3,α 4,β 1,β 2,β 3和β 4分别表示权重。 Among them, q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel, i represents the abscissa of the pixel point of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed, and j+1 represents the pixel of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed The ordinate of the point, Q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed, α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 , β 1 , β 2 , β 3 and β 4 represent the weights, respectively.
在一种可能的设计中,多帧图像包括第一图像和第二图像;控制组件,具体用于分时将多帧图像输入给显示组件,使得显示组件分时显示多帧图像;在第一时间单元控制像素位置调整组件在第一位置输出第一图像,并控制第二时间单元控制像素位置调整组件在第二位置输出第二图像。第一位置与第二位置在水平方向上的间隔为Px/2;或者,第一位置与第二位置在垂直方向上的间隔为Py/2;或者,第一位置与第二位置在水平方向上的间隔为Px/2且第一位置与第二位置在垂直方向上的间隔为Py/2;第一时间单元和第二时间单元时间相邻。In a possible design, the multi-frame images include a first image and a second image; the control component is specifically configured to input the multi-frame images to the display component in time division, so that the display component displays the multi-frame images in time division; The time unit controls the pixel position adjustment component to output the first image at the first position, and the second time unit controls the pixel position adjustment component to output the second image at the second position. The distance between the first position and the second position in the horizontal direction is Px/2; or, the distance between the first position and the second position in the vertical direction is Py/2; or, the distance between the first position and the second position in the horizontal direction The interval above is Px/2 and the interval between the first position and the second position in the vertical direction is Py/2; the first time unit and the second time unit are temporally adjacent.
在一种可能的设计中,控制组件,具体用于在第一时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输入的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向,在第二时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输入的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向,以使得偏振位移器件输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的第一位置与输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的第二位置在水平方向上间隔为Px/2;Px表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在水平方向的间距。通过上述设计,提供一种实现水平超分的方式,实现简单且有效。In a possible design, the control component is specifically configured to control the polarization converter to adjust the input polarization direction of the target polarized light carrying the first image to the first polarization direction within the first time unit, and within the second time unit controlling the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light carrying the second image to the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light carrying the first image output by the polarization displacement device is the same as that of the output carrying the second image The distance between the second positions of the target polarized light in the horizontal direction is Px/2; Px represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the horizontal direction. Through the above design, a method for realizing horizontal over-resolution is provided, which is simple and effective.
在一种可能的设计中,控制组件,具体用于在第一时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输入的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向,在第二时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输入的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向,以使得偏振位移器件输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的第一位置与输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的第二位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2;Py表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在竖直方向的间距。通过上述设计,提供一种实现垂直超分的方式,实现简单且有效。In a possible design, the control component is specifically configured to control the polarization converter to adjust the input polarization direction of the target polarized light carrying the first image to the first polarization direction within the first time unit, and within the second time unit controlling the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light carrying the second image to the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light carrying the first image output by the polarization displacement device is the same as that of the output carrying the second image The distance between the second positions of the target polarized light in the vertical direction is Py/2; Py represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the vertical direction. Through the above design, a method for realizing vertical super-resolution is provided, which is simple and effective.
在一种可能的设计中,控制组件,具体用于在第一时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输入的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向,在第二时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输入的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向,以使得偏振位移器件输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的第一位置与输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的第二位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2且在水平方向上偏移Px/2,Py表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在竖直方向的间距,Px表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在竖直方向的间距。通过上述设计,提供一种实现对角超分的方式,实现简单且有效。In a possible design, the control component is specifically configured to control the polarization converter to adjust the input polarization direction of the target polarized light carrying the first image to the first polarization direction within the first time unit, and within the second time unit controlling the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light carrying the second image to the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light carrying the first image output by the polarization displacement device is the same as that of the output carrying the second image The second position of the target polarized light is spaced by Py/2 in the vertical direction and shifted by Px/2 in the horizontal direction, Py represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the vertical direction, and Px represents The distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the vertical direction. Through the above design, a method for realizing diagonal super-resolution is provided, which is simple and effective.
在一种可能的设计中,偏振转换器包括扭曲向列向液晶或者面内旋转液晶;或者偏振转换器包括胆甾相液晶和1/4波片。In one possible design, the polarization converter includes twisted nematic liquid crystals or in-plane spun liquid crystals; or the polarization converter includes cholesteric liquid crystals and 1/4 wave plates.
在一种可能的设计中,偏振位移器件为双折射液晶,双折射液晶采用石英晶体、硼酸钡晶体、铌酸锂晶体或者二氧化钛晶体或者液晶聚合物。In a possible design, the polarization displacement device is a birefringent liquid crystal, and the birefringent liquid crystal adopts quartz crystal, barium borate crystal, lithium niobate crystal or titanium dioxide crystal or liquid crystal polymer.
在一种可能的设计中,显示模组还包括折叠光路,折叠光路位于显示组件与像素位置调整组件之间,折叠光路用于将承载多帧图像的任一图像的目标偏振光传输至像素位置调整组件。In a possible design, the display module further includes a folded light path, which is located between the display component and the pixel position adjustment component, and the folded light path is used to transmit the target polarized light of any image carrying multiple frames of images to the pixel position Adjust components.
第二方面,本申请实施例提供一种成像控制方法,方法应用于显示设备,显示设备包括显示组件和像素位置调整组件,显示组件包括多个像素,多个像素中每个像素包括多个亚像素;方法包括:接收待显示图像,将待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到多帧图像;多帧图像中每帧图像的分辨率与显示组件的分辨率相同,多帧图像的分辨率小于待显示图像的分辨率;控制像素位置调整组件分时调整显示组件显示的每帧图像的位置;其中,显示组件显示第一图像的时间与像素位置调整组件调整第一图像的时间同步,第一图像为多帧图像中任一图像。In the second aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an imaging control method, the method is applied to a display device, the display device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component, the display component includes a plurality of pixels, each of the plurality of pixels includes a plurality of sub-pixels pixel; the method includes: receiving the image to be displayed, and decomposing the image to be displayed at sub-pixel level to obtain a multi-frame image; the resolution of each frame of the image in the multi-frame image is the same as the resolution of the display component, and the resolution of the multi-frame image is smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed Display the resolution of the image; control the pixel position adjustment component to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time-sharing; wherein, the time when the display component displays the first image is synchronized with the time when the pixel position adjustment component adjusts the first image, and the first image is any image in the multi-frame images.
在一种可能的设计中,将待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到多帧图像,包括:In a possible design, sub-pixel-level decomposition of the image to be displayed is performed to obtain multi-frame images, including:
当显示设备的超分模式使能时,将待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到多帧图像。When the super-resolution mode of the display device is enabled, the image to be displayed is decomposed at the sub-pixel level to obtain a multi-frame image.
在一种可能的设计中,方法还包括:In one possible design, the method also includes:
在显示设备的超分模式未使能时,对待显示图像进行降采样处理到待处理图像;When the super-resolution mode of the display device is not enabled, the image to be displayed is down-sampled to the image to be processed;
将所述待处理图像输入给所述显示组件,使得所述显示组件显示待处理图像;inputting the image to be processed to the display component, so that the display component displays the image to be processed;
通过像素位置调整组件在设定位置输出所述待处理图像。The image to be processed is output at a set position through a pixel position adjustment component.
在一种可能的设计中,多帧图像中的第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从待显 示图像包括的相邻的至少h个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;In a possible design, the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image in the multi-frame image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in at least h adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed;
其中,h为多帧图像的图像数量,第一图像为多帧图像中的任一图像,第一像素点是第一图像中的任一像素点。Wherein, h is the number of images in the multi-frame images, the first image is any image in the multi-frame images, and the first pixel is any pixel in the first image.
在一种可能的设计中,第一像素点中包括的第一亚像素的像素值是根据待显示图像的设定区域包括的与第一亚像素的颜色相同的亚像素的像素值确定的;In a possible design, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is determined according to the pixel value of the sub-pixel that is the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the set area of the image to be displayed;
设定区域的几何中心为第一亚像素在待显示图像中的采样位置。The geometric center of the set area is the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed.
在一种可能的设计中,第一像素点中包括的第一亚像素的像素值是对设定区域包括的与第一亚像素的颜色相同的亚像素的像素值进行加权求和得到;In a possible design, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is obtained by weighting and summing the pixel values of the sub-pixels included in the set area with the same color as the first sub-pixel;
其中,设定区域包括的与第一亚像素颜色相同的亚像素的权重与亚像素之间距离成反比;亚像素之间的距离为与第一亚像素颜色相同的亚像素和第一亚像素在待显示图像中的采样位置之间的距离。Wherein, the weight of the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the setting area is inversely proportional to the distance between the sub-pixels; the distance between the sub-pixels is the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel and the first sub-pixel The distance between sample locations in the image to be displayed.
在一种可能的设计中,显示设备为可穿戴设备,设定区域的大小与显示组件和可穿戴设备的成像平面之间的距离相关。In a possible design, the display device is a wearable device, and the size of the set area is related to the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device.
在一种可能的设计中,设定区域的大小与显示组件的像素尺寸相关。In a possible design, the size of the setting area is related to the pixel size of the display component.
在一种可能的设计中,设定区域的大小与显示组件的显示内容相关。In a possible design, the size of the setting area is related to the display content of the display component.
在一种可能的设计中,第一亚像素的像素值满足如下公式所示的条件:In a possible design, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
q(i,j)=α 1*Q(i-1,j)+α 2*Q(i,j-1)+α 3*Q(i+1,j)+α 4*Q(i,j+1)+α 5*Q(i,j); q(i,j)=α 1 *Q(i-1,j)+α 2 *Q(i,j-1)+α 3 *Q(i+1,j)+α 4 *Q(i, j+1)+α 5 *Q(i,j);
其中,q(i,j)表示第一亚像素的像素值;i表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的横坐标;j表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的纵坐标;Q(i,j)表示第一亚像素在待显示图像中采样位置的亚像素的像素值;α 1,α 2,α 3,α 4和α 5分别表示权重。 Among them, q(i, j) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel; i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed; j represents the ordinate of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed ; Q(i,j) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed; α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 and α 5 represent the weights respectively.
在一种可能的设计中,第一亚像素的像素值满足如下公式所示的条件:In a possible design, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
q(i,j+1)=α 1*Q(i-1,j)+α 2*Q(i,j-1)+α 3*Q(i+1,j)+α 4*Q(i,j+1) q(i,j+1)=α 1 *Q(i-1,j)+α 2 *Q(i,j-1)+α 3 *Q(i+1,j)+α 4 *Q( i,j+1)
1*Q(i-1,j+1)+β 2*Q(i,j)+β 3*Q(i+1,j+1)+β 4*Q(i,j+2)。 1 *Q(i-1,j+1)+β 2 *Q(i,j)+β 3 *Q(i+1,j+1)+β 4 *Q(i,j+2) .
其中,q(i,j+1)表示第一亚像素的像素值,i表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的横坐标,j+1表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的纵坐标,Q(i,j+1)表示第一亚像素在待显示图像中采样位置的亚像素的像素值,α 1,α 2,α 3,α 4,β 1,β 2,β 3和β 4分别表示权重。 Among them, q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel, i represents the abscissa of the pixel point of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed, and j+1 represents the pixel of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed The ordinate of the point, Q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed, α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 , β 1 , β 2 , β 3 and β 4 represent the weights, respectively.
在一种可能的设计中,多帧图像包括所述第一图像和第二图像,控制所述像素位置调整组件分时调整所述显示组件显示的每帧图像的位置,包括:分时将所述多帧图像输入给所述显示组件,使得所述显示组件分时显示所述多帧图像;在第一时间单元控制所述像素位置调整组件在第一位置输出所述第一图像,并控制第二时间单元控制所述像素位置调整组件在第二位置输出所述第二图像;所述第一位置与所述第二位置在水平方向上的间隔为Px/2;或者,所述第一位置与所述第二位置在垂直方向上的间隔为Py/2;或者,所述第一位置与所述第二位置在水平方向上的间隔为Px/2且所述第一位置与所述第二位置在垂直方向上的间隔为Py/2;所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元时间相邻。In a possible design, the multiple frames of images include the first image and the second image, and controlling the pixel position adjustment component to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time division includes: The multi-frame image is input to the display component, so that the display component displays the multi-frame image in time; the pixel position adjustment component is controlled to output the first image at the first position in the first time unit, and the control The second time unit controls the pixel position adjustment component to output the second image at a second position; the interval between the first position and the second position in the horizontal direction is Px/2; or, the first The distance between the position and the second position in the vertical direction is Py/2; or, the distance between the first position and the second position in the horizontal direction is Px/2 and the distance between the first position and the The interval between the second positions in the vertical direction is Py/2; the first time unit and the second time unit are temporally adjacent.
在一种可能的设计中,所述像素位置调整组件包括偏振转换器和偏振位移器件;在第一时间单元控制所述像素位置调整组件在第一位置输出所述第一图像,并控制第二时间单元控制所述像素位置调整组件在第二位置输出所述第二图像,包括:控制所述偏振转换器分时调整目标偏振光的偏振方向,所述目标偏振光是所述显示组件分时显示多帧图像时产生的;使得所述偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向时,所述偏振位 移器件在第一位置输出所述目标偏振光,在偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向时,所述偏振位移器件在第二位置输出所述目标偏振光。In a possible design, the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization converter and a polarization displacement device; the pixel position adjustment component is controlled to output the first image at the first position in a first time unit, and the second The time unit controls the pixel position adjustment component to output the second image at the second position, including: controlling the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the target polarized light in a time-division manner, and the target polarized light is time-divided by the display component Generated when multiple frames of images are displayed; when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the first polarization direction, the polarization displacement device outputs the target polarized light at the first position, and when the polarization converter outputs When the polarization direction of the target polarized light is the second polarization direction, the polarization displacement device outputs the target polarized light at the second position.
在一种可能的设计中,控制偏振转换器分时调整输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向,包括:In a possible design, the polarization converter is controlled to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light, including:
在第一时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向,在第二时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向,以使得偏振位移器件输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的第一位置与输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的第二位置在水平方向上间隔为Px/2;Px表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在水平方向的间距。In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output polarization direction of the target polarized light bearing the first image to be the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output target polarization bearing the second image. The polarization direction of the light is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the second position of the output target polarized light bearing the second image are spaced horizontally by Px/2; Px represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the horizontal direction.
在一种可能的设计中,第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从待显示图像包括的水平相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;In a possible design, the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in two horizontally adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed;
第二图像中的第二像素点包括的亚像素是从水平相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;The sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in two horizontally adjacent pixels;
第一像素点在第一图像中的位置坐标与第二像素点在第二图像中的位置坐标相同。The position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
在一种可能的设计中,控制偏振转换器分时调整输入的目标偏振光的偏振方向,包括:In a possible design, the polarization converter is controlled to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light, including:
在第一时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向,在第二时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向,以使得偏振位移器件输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的第一位置与输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的第二位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2;Py表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在竖直方向的间距。In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output polarization direction of the target polarized light bearing the first image to be the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output target polarization bearing the second image. The polarization direction of the light is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the second position of the output target polarized light bearing the second image are spaced vertically by Py/2; Py represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the vertical direction.
在一种可能的设计中,第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从待显示图像中垂直方向上相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;In a possible design, the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the vertical direction in the image to be displayed;
第二图像中的第二像素点包括的亚像素是从垂直方向上相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;The sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the vertical direction;
第一像素点在第一图像中的位置坐标与第二像素点在第二图像中的位置坐标相同。The position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
在一种可能的设计中,控制偏振转换器分时调整输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向,包括:In a possible design, the polarization converter is controlled to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light, including:
第一时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输入的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向,在第二时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输入的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向,以使得偏振位移器件输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的第一位置与输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的第二位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2且在水平方向上偏移Px/2,Py表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在竖直方向的间距,Px表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在竖直方向的间距。In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light bearing the first image to the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the input target polarized light bearing the second image. The polarization direction of is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the output second position of the target polarized light bearing the second image are separated by Py in the vertical direction /2 and offset Px/2 in the horizontal direction, Py represents the vertical distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image, and Px represents the vertical distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image Pitch.
在一种可能的设计中,第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从待显示图像中对角方向上相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;In a possible design, the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in a diagonal direction in the image to be displayed;
第二图像中的第二像素点包括的亚像素是从对角方向上相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;The sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the diagonal direction;
第一像素点在第一图像中的位置坐标与第二像素点在第二图像中的位置坐标相同。The position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
第三方面,本申请实施例提供一种显示模组,包括显示组件、至少一个调整组件和控制组件;调整组件包括偏振旋转器和双折射器件;显示组件,用于接收待处理图像,并显示待处理图像,待处理图像的分辨率与显示组件的分辨率相同;偏振旋转器,用于在控制组件的控制下调整待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向;双折射器件,用于对待处理 图像包括的每个像素的光束进行分解,在第一位置输出用于投影第一子图像的第一目标偏振光以及在第二位置输出用于投影第二子图像的第二目标偏振光;其中,第一像素的分解比例与第二像素的分解比例不同,第一像素与第二像素为待处理图像中偏振方向不同的两个像素,第一像素的分解比例为第一像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例,第二像素的分解比例为第二像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例。本申请实施例中,通过偏振旋转器和双折射器件结合,且利用双折射器件输出两束光的原理来输出两个子图像,使得两个子图像的叠加接近于源待显示图像,提高显示图像的分辨率。In the third aspect, the embodiment of the present application provides a display module, including a display component, at least one adjustment component and a control component; the adjustment component includes a polarization rotator and a birefringent device; the display component is used to receive the image to be processed, and display The image to be processed, the resolution of the image to be processed is the same as the resolution of the display component; the polarization rotator is used to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed under the control of the control component; the birefringent device is used to Decomposing the light beam of each pixel included in the image to be processed, outputting the first target polarized light for projecting the first sub-image at the first position and outputting the second target polarized light for projecting the second sub-image at the second position ; Wherein, the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is different from that of the second pixel, the first pixel and the second pixel are two pixels with different polarization directions in the image to be processed, and the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is the light beam of the first pixel The ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image after decomposition to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image, the decomposition ratio of the second pixel is the decomposed beam of the second pixel projected on the first sub-image The luminous intensity of the pixel is proportional to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image. In the embodiment of the present application, the polarization rotator is combined with the birefringent device, and the principle of outputting two beams of light by the birefringent device is used to output two sub-images, so that the superposition of the two sub-images is close to the source image to be displayed, improving the display image quality resolution.
在一种可能的设计中,第一子图像的位置与第二子图像的位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2和/或在水平方向上间隔Px/2,Py表示像素在竖直方向的间距,Px表示像素在竖直方向的间距。In a possible design, the position of the first sub-image and the position of the second sub-image are separated by Py/2 in the vertical direction and/or separated by Px/2 in the horizontal direction, where Py represents the distance between pixels in the vertical direction Pitch, Px represents the pixel pitch in the vertical direction.
在一种可能的设计中,控制组件,具体用于控制偏振旋转器调整每个像素包括的亚像素的光束的偏振方向。In a possible design, the control component is specifically used to control the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beams of the sub-pixels included in each pixel.
在一种可能的设计中,待处理图像是对待显示图像进行降采样处理得到的;控制组件,具体用于:根据待显示图像的每个像素的发光强度估计待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度;其中,第一子图像和第二子图像的分辨率相同,且小于待显示图像的分辨率;根据待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制偏振旋转器调整待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。In a possible design, the image to be processed is obtained by down-sampling the image to be displayed; the control component is specifically configured to: estimate each sub-image to be projected as the first sub-image according to the luminous intensity of each pixel of the image to be displayed The luminous intensity of each pixel and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image; wherein, the resolution of the first sub-image and the second sub-image is the same, and is smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed; according to to be projected as The luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image control the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed.
在一种可能的设计中,待处理图像是对待显示图像进行降采样处理得到的;控制组件,具体用于:估计并调整待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,使得调整后的第一子图像和第二子图像叠加投影后的图像与待显示图像的相似度大于设定阈值;设定阈值是根据人眼对图像差异的感知能力确定的;根据调整后的第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制偏振旋转器调整待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。In a possible design, the image to be processed is obtained by down-sampling the image to be displayed; the control component is specifically used to: estimate and adjust the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity to be projected as The luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image is such that the similarity between the adjusted first sub-image and the second sub-image superimposed projected image and the image to be displayed is greater than the set threshold; the set threshold is based on the perception of the human eye. The perception of image difference is determined; according to the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image, the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed direction of polarization.
第四方面,本申请实施例提供一种成像控制方法,方法应用于可穿戴设备,可穿戴设备包括显示组件和像素位置调整组件,像素位置调整组件包括偏振旋转器和双折射器件;方法包括:接收待显示图像,对待显示图像进行降采样处理得到待处理图像,并将待处理图像输入给显示组件,使得显示组件发射承载待显示图像的目标偏振光,其中,目标帧图像为多帧图像中的一帧图像,待处理图像的分辨率与显示组件的分辨率相同;控制偏振旋转器调整输出的待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,使得双折射器件对待处理图像包括的每个像素的光束进行分解,在第一位置输出用于投影第一子图像的第一目标偏振光以及在第二位置输出用于投影第二子图像的第二目标偏振光;其中,第一像素的分解比例与第二像素的分解比例不同,第一像素与第二像素为待处理图像中偏振方向不同的两个像素,第一像素的分解比例为第一像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例,第二像素的分解比例为第二像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例。In a fourth aspect, an embodiment of the present application provides an imaging control method, the method is applied to a wearable device, the wearable device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component, and the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization rotator and a birefringent device; the method includes: Receive the image to be displayed, perform down-sampling processing on the image to be displayed to obtain the image to be processed, and input the image to be processed to the display component, so that the display component emits target polarized light carrying the image to be displayed, wherein the target frame image is a multi-frame image A frame of image, the resolution of the image to be processed is the same as the resolution of the display component; control the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed, so that the birefringent device includes each pixel in the image to be processed The light beam of the pixel is decomposed, and the first target polarized light for projecting the first sub-image is output at the first position and the second target polarized light for projecting the second sub-image is output at the second position; wherein, the first pixel's The decomposition ratio is different from that of the second pixel. The first pixel and the second pixel are two pixels with different polarization directions in the image to be processed. The decomposition ratio of the first pixel is that the light beam of the first pixel is projected on the first pixel after decomposition. The ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel of the sub-image to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image, the decomposition ratio of the second pixel is the ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image after the light beam of the second pixel is decomposed and projected on the The luminous intensity scale of the pixels of the second subimage.
在一种可能的设计中,第一子图像的位置与第二子图像的位置在垂直方向上间隔为 Py/2和/或在水平方向上间隔Px/2,Py表示像素在竖直方向的间距,Px表示像素在竖直方向的间距。In a possible design, the position of the first sub-image and the position of the second sub-image are separated by Py/2 in the vertical direction and/or separated by Px/2 in the horizontal direction, where Py represents the distance between pixels in the vertical direction Pitch, Px represents the pixel pitch in the vertical direction.
在一种可能的设计中,控制偏振旋转器调整输出的待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,包括:控制偏振旋转器调整待处理图像的每个像素包括的亚像素的光束的偏振方向。In a possible design, controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes: controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization of the beam of the sub-pixel included in each pixel of the image to be processed direction.
在一种可能的设计中,控制偏振旋转器调整输出的待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,包括:根据待显示图像的每个像素的发光强度估计待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度;其中,第一子图像和第二子图像的分辨率相同,且小于待显示图像的分辨率;根据待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制偏振旋转器调整待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。In a possible design, controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes: estimating the light beam to be projected as the first sub-image according to the luminous intensity of each pixel of the image to be displayed The luminous intensity of each pixel and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image; wherein, the resolution of the first sub-image and the second sub-image is the same, and is smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed; according to the to-be-projected For the luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image, the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed.
在一种可能的设计中,控制偏振旋转器调整输出的待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,包括:估计并调整待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,使得调整后的第一子图像和第二子图像叠加投影后的图像与待显示图像的相似度大于设定阈值;设定阈值是根据人眼对图像差异的感知能力确定的;根据调整后的第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制偏振旋转器调整待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。In a possible design, controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes: estimating and adjusting the luminous intensity and the to-be-projected luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image is the luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image, so that the similarity between the adjusted first sub-image and the second sub-image superimposed projected image and the image to be displayed is greater than the set threshold; the set threshold is based on the human eye The perception of image difference is determined; according to the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image, the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the luminous intensity of each pixel of the image to be processed The polarization direction of the beam.
第五方面,本申请提供一种控制装置,该控制装置用于实现上述第二方面或者第四方面中的任意一种方法,包括相应的功能模块,分别用于实现以上方法中的步骤。功能可以通过硬件实现,也可以通过硬件执行相应的软件实现。硬件或软件包括一个或多个与上述功能相对应的模块。In a fifth aspect, the present application provides a control device, which is used to implement any one of the methods in the second aspect or the fourth aspect above, and includes corresponding functional modules, respectively used to implement the steps in the above methods. The functions may be implemented by hardware, or may be implemented by executing corresponding software through hardware. Hardware or software includes one or more modules corresponding to the above-mentioned functions.
第六方面,本申请提供一种计算机可读存储介质,计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序或指令,当计算机程序或指令被显示设备执行时,使得该显示设备执行上述第二方面或第四方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a sixth aspect, the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, in which a computer program or instruction is stored, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by a display device, the display device executes the above-mentioned second aspect or the first aspect. A method in any possible implementation of the four aspects.
第七方面,本申请提供一种计算机程序产品,该计算机程序产品包括计算机程序或指令,当该计算机程序或指令被控制装置执行时,实现上述第二方面或第四方面的任意可能的实现方式中的方法。In a seventh aspect, the present application provides a computer program product, the computer program product includes a computer program or instruction, and when the computer program or instruction is executed by the control device, any possible implementation manner of the above-mentioned second aspect or the fourth aspect can be realized method in .
附图说明Description of drawings
图1A为RGB Stripe排列方式示意图;Figure 1A is a schematic diagram of the RGB Stripe arrangement;
图1B为pentile RGBG排列方式示意图;Figure 1B is a schematic diagram of the arrangement of pentile RGBG;
图1C为delta RGB排列方式示意图;Fig. 1C is a schematic diagram of delta RGB arrangement;
图1D为pentile RGBW排列方式示意图;Figure 1D is a schematic diagram of the arrangement of pentile RGBW;
图2为本申请实施例中显示组件结构示意图;FIG. 2 is a schematic structural diagram of display components in an embodiment of the present application;
图3A为本申请实施例中显示模组结构示意图;FIG. 3A is a schematic diagram of the structure of the display module in the embodiment of the present application;
图3B为本申请实施例中显示模组结构示意图;FIG. 3B is a schematic diagram of the structure of the display module in the embodiment of the present application;
图4为本申请实施例中对角超分原理示意图;Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of the principle of diagonal super-resolution in the embodiment of the present application;
图5A为结合偏振光栅实现分辨率增强的示意图;Fig. 5A is a schematic diagram of realizing resolution enhancement in combination with a polarization grating;
图5B为图像像素偏移实现分辨率增强的示意图;FIG. 5B is a schematic diagram of image pixel offset to achieve resolution enhancement;
图6为本申请实施例中采用双折射器件的显示模组的光束传输示意图;FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of beam transmission of a display module using a birefringent device in an embodiment of the present application;
图7为本申请实施例中双折射器件的光输出原理示意图;Fig. 7 is a schematic diagram of the light output principle of the birefringent device in the embodiment of the present application;
图8为本申请实施例中双折射器件的厚度与双折射器件o光和e光的折射率差Δn的关系;Fig. 8 is the relationship between the thickness of the birefringent device and the refractive index difference Δn of the o-light and e-light of the birefringent device in the embodiment of the present application;
图9为本申请实施例中显示模组结构示意图;Fig. 9 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the display module in the embodiment of the present application;
图10为本申请实施例中亚像素采样概念示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the concept of sub-pixel sampling in the embodiment of the present application;
图11A为本申请实施例中对角超分下待显示图像采样分解示意图;Fig. 11A is a schematic diagram of sample decomposition of an image to be displayed under diagonal super-resolution in the embodiment of the present application;
图11B为本申请实施例中对角超分下待显示图像采样分解示意图;Fig. 11B is a schematic diagram of sample decomposition of the image to be displayed under diagonal super-resolution in the embodiment of the present application;
图12为本申请实施例中垂直超分下待显示图像采样分解示意图;Fig. 12 is a schematic diagram of sample decomposition of images to be displayed under vertical super-resolution in the embodiment of the present application;
图13为本申请实施例中控制时序示意图;FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of control timing in the embodiment of the present application;
图14为本申请实施例中显示模组中的光束传输方向示意图;Fig. 14 is a schematic diagram of the beam transmission direction in the display module in the embodiment of the present application;
图15为本申请实施例中对角超分下低分辨率子帧叠加显示示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram of the overlay display of low-resolution subframes under diagonal super-resolution in the embodiment of the present application;
图16A为本申请实施例中一种待显示图像采样分解示意图;FIG. 16A is a schematic diagram of sampling and decomposition of an image to be displayed in the embodiment of the present application;
图16B为本申请实施例中一种待显示图像采样分解示意图;FIG. 16B is a schematic diagram of sampling and decomposition of an image to be displayed in the embodiment of the present application;
图17为本申请实施例中低分辨率子帧叠加显示示意图;FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of low-resolution subframe superposition display in the embodiment of the present application;
图18为本申请实施例中亚像素的像素值计算原理示意图;FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram of the calculation principle of the pixel value of the sub-pixel in the embodiment of the present application;
图19为本申请实施例中亚像素的像素值计算原理示意图;FIG. 19 is a schematic diagram of the calculation principle of the pixel value of the sub-pixel in the embodiment of the present application;
图20为本申请实施例中显示模组结构示意图;Figure 20 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the display module in the embodiment of the present application;
图21为本申请实施例中显示模组结构示意图;Figure 21 is a schematic diagram of the structure of the display module in the embodiment of the present application;
图22为本申请实施例中偏转旋转器实现转换输出的偏振光示意图;Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram of the polarized light converted and output by the deflection rotator in the embodiment of the present application;
图23为本申请实施例中分辨率增强原理示意图;Fig. 23 is a schematic diagram of the principle of resolution enhancement in the embodiment of the present application;
图24为本申请实施例中成像控制方法流程示意图;FIG. 24 is a schematic flow chart of an imaging control method in an embodiment of the present application;
图25为本申请实施例中成像控制方法流程示意图。FIG. 25 is a schematic flowchart of an imaging control method in an embodiment of the present application.
具体实施方式Detailed ways
下面将结合附图,对本申请实施例进行详细描述。Embodiments of the present application will be described in detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings.
以下,对本申请中的部分用语进行解释说明。需要说明的是,这些解释是为了便于本领域技术人员理解,并不是对本申请所要求的保护范围构成限定。Hereinafter, some terms used in this application will be explained. It should be noted that these explanations are for the convenience of those skilled in the art to understand, and do not limit the scope of protection required by the present application.
(1)近眼显示:(1) Near-eye display:
在距离眼睛近处显示,是AR显示设备或VR显示设备的一种显示方式。Displaying near the eyes is a display method of AR display devices or VR display devices.
(2)角分辨率也可以称为空间分辨率,是指视场角平均每1度夹角内填充的像素点的数量。在清晰感达到人眼对所能分辨的极限之前,人眼视野中单位区域的画面内填充的像素点的数量越多,视觉感受越清晰细腻。PPD越大,人眼视野中单位区域的画面内填充的像素点的数量越多,用户对显示画面的感受就越清晰。(2) Angular resolution can also be referred to as spatial resolution, which refers to the number of pixels filled in an average angle of 1 degree of field of view. Before the sense of clarity reaches the limit that the human eye can distinguish, the more pixels are filled in the screen of a unit area in the human eye's field of view, the clearer and more delicate the visual experience will be. The larger the PPD, the more pixels are filled in the screen of a unit area in the field of view of the human eye, and the clearer the user's perception of the display screen is.
(3)亚像素:(3) Sub-pixel:
显示屏上的最小图像单元是像素(pixel)。一个像素是由三个颜色不同的亚像素组成的。亚像素也可以称为子像素(sub pixel)。比如,红色(R)亚像素、绿色(G)亚像素以及蓝色(B)亚像素组成一个像素。显示屏采用的像素排列方式可以包括RGB条纹(stripe)排列、pentile RGBG排列、pentile RGBW排列、delta RGB排列等。The smallest image unit on a display is a pixel. A pixel is composed of three sub-pixels of different colors. Sub-pixels can also be referred to as sub-pixels. For example, a red (R) sub-pixel, a green (G) sub-pixel and a blue (B) sub-pixel form one pixel. The pixel arrangement adopted by the display screen may include RGB stripe arrangement, pentile RGBG arrangement, pentile RGBW arrangement, delta RGB arrangement and the like.
图1A为传统显示屏常用的像素排布方式RGB Stripe,呈长条状排布,每个像素包含R、G、B各一个。Figure 1A shows RGB Stripe, a commonly used pixel arrangement method for traditional display screens. It is arranged in long strips, and each pixel includes one R, one G, and one B.
图1B为pentile RGBG排布,每个像素包含有两个子像素,以RG、BG的组合交替出现。Figure 1B shows the arrangement of pentile RGBG, each pixel contains two sub-pixels, which alternately appear in the combination of RG and BG.
图1C为delta RGB排布,每个像素均包含RGB三个子像素,相邻两个像素存在共用的子像素,以图1C中的第a行为例,像素1和像素2共用一个蓝色子像素,像素2和像素3共用红色子像素和绿色子像素。Figure 1C is a delta RGB arrangement, each pixel contains three RGB sub-pixels, and two adjacent pixels have shared sub-pixels, taking row a in Figure 1C as an example, pixel 1 and pixel 2 share a blue sub-pixel , pixel 2 and pixel 3 share the red sub-pixel and the green sub-pixel.
图1D为pentile RGBW排列,每个像素均包括红色(R)亚像素、绿色(G)亚像素、蓝色(B)亚像素以及白色(W)亚像素。Figure 1D is a pentile RGBW arrangement, each pixel includes a red (R) sub-pixel, a green (G) sub-pixel, a blue (B) sub-pixel and a white (W) sub-pixel.
可以看出,在RGB Stripe排布方式中,三个像素由9个子像素组成;在RGBG排布方式中,三个像素由6个子像素组成;在RGB delta排布方式中,三个像素由6个子像素组成。因此,当像素个数相同时,RGBG排布方式和RGB delta排布方式比RGB Stripe排布方式所需的子像素个数更少。It can be seen that in the RGB Stripe arrangement, three pixels are composed of 9 sub-pixels; in the RGBG arrangement, three pixels are composed of 6 sub-pixels; in the RGB delta arrangement, three pixels are composed of 6 sub-pixels composed of sub-pixels. Therefore, when the number of pixels is the same, the RGBG arrangement and the RGB delta arrangement require fewer sub-pixels than the RGB Stripe arrangement.
本申请实施例应用于显示设备。比如具有显示屏的终端设备,比如手机、显示器、电视等等。显示设备还可以是可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备可以是近眼显示(near eye display,NED)设备,例如VR眼镜,或者VR头盔等。例如,用户佩戴NED设备进行游戏、阅读、观看电影(或电视剧)、参加虚拟会议、参加视频教育、或视频购物等。The embodiment of the present application is applied to a display device. For example, a terminal device with a display screen, such as a mobile phone, a monitor, a TV, and the like. The display device can also be a wearable device. The wearable device may be a near eye display (near eye display, NED) device, such as VR glasses, or a VR helmet. For example, users wear NED devices to play games, read, watch movies (or TV series), participate in virtual conferences, participate in video education, or video shopping.
为了实现采用低分辨率显示屏实现人眼看到高分辨率图像的效果,可以采用分辨率增强方式,也可以称为超分辨率,来提升低分辨率显示屏的分辨率。参见图2所示,为本申请实施例提供的显示模组结构示意图。显示模组包括显示组件100、至少一个像素位置调整组件200和控制组件300。图2中以显示模组中包括一个像素位置调整组件200为例。显示组件100,用于显示图像。像素位置调整组件200,用于调整显示组件100显示的图像的位置。比如显示设备为可穿戴设备,像素位置调整组件200调整显示组件100显示的图像成像到距离显示组件100一定距离的虚像面上位置。显示组件100在控制组件300的控制下分时显示多帧图像。其中,多帧图像可以是控制组件300对待显示图像进行降采样得到的。比如,控制组件300将高分辨率的待显示图像拆分为多个低分辨率图像。低分辨率图像的分辨率与显示组件的分辨率相同。控制组件300将多个低分辨率的图像分时发送给显示组件100进行显示。像素位置调整组件,用于在控制组件的控制下分时调整显示组件显示的每帧图像的位置;其中,显示组件显示第一图像的时间与像素位置调整组件调整第一图像的时间同步,第一图像为多帧图像中任一图像。In order to achieve the effect of using a low-resolution display to achieve the effect of human eyes seeing high-resolution images, a resolution enhancement method, also known as super-resolution, can be used to increase the resolution of the low-resolution display. Referring to FIG. 2 , it is a schematic structural diagram of a display module provided by an embodiment of the present application. The display module includes a display component 100 , at least one pixel position adjustment component 200 and a control component 300 . In FIG. 2 , the display module includes a pixel position adjustment component 200 as an example. The display component 100 is used for displaying images. The pixel position adjustment component 200 is configured to adjust the position of the image displayed by the display component 100 . For example, the display device is a wearable device, and the pixel position adjustment component 200 adjusts the imaging of the image displayed by the display component 100 to a position on a virtual image plane at a certain distance from the display component 100 . Under the control of the control component 300 , the display component 100 displays multiple frames of images in time division. Wherein, the multi-frame images may be obtained by down-sampling the image to be displayed by the control component 300 . For example, the control component 300 splits a high-resolution image to be displayed into multiple low-resolution images. The low resolution image has the same resolution as the display component. The control component 300 sends multiple low-resolution images to the display component 100 in time division for display. The pixel position adjustment component is used to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time division under the control of the control component; wherein, the time when the display component displays the first image is synchronized with the time when the pixel position adjustment component adjusts the first image, the first An image is any image in multiple frames of images.
一种可能的实施例中,像素位置调整组件可以为马达,控制组件300通过分时控制马达机械移动,使实现分时调整显示组件显示的每帧图像的位置。马达可以是超声马达或者伺服马达等等。In a possible embodiment, the pixel position adjustment component may be a motor, and the control component 300 controls the mechanical movement of the motor in time division, so as to realize the time division adjustment of the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component. The motor may be an ultrasonic motor or a servo motor or the like.
另一种可能的实施例中,参见图3A所示,像素位置调整组件200可以包括偏振转换器210和偏振位移器件220。偏振转换器210,用于在控制组件300的控制下分时调整偏振转换器210输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向,目标偏振光承载多帧图像中的一帧图像。偏振位移器件220,用于在偏振转换器210输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向时,在第一位置输出目标偏振光,在偏振转换器210输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向时,在第二位置输出目标偏振光;其中,第一图像的显示时间与承载第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向调整时间同步,第一图像为多帧图像的任一帧图像。In another possible embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3A , the pixel position adjustment component 200 may include a polarization converter 210 and a polarization displacement device 220 . The polarization converter 210 is configured to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter 210 under the control of the control component 300 , and the target polarized light carries one frame of images among multiple frames of images. The polarization displacement device 220 is used to output the target polarized light at the first position when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter 210 is the first polarization direction, and the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter 210 is In the second polarization direction, the target polarized light is output at the second position; wherein, the display time of the first image is synchronized with the polarization direction adjustment time of the target polarized light carrying the first image, and the first image is any frame of the multi-frame image image.
作为一种举例,以多帧图像为两帧图像为例,利用本申请实施例提供的显示模组,可以实现水平方向超分、或者垂直方向超分,或者对角方向超分。水平方向超分,可以理解 是偏振位移器件输出的光束形成的两帧图像在水平方向上的间隔距离为Px/2;所述Px表示两帧图像的相邻像素在水平方向的间距,从而实现水平方向的分辨率翻倍。在采用水平方向超分时,偏振位移器件需要具备实现偏移矢量为(Px/2,0)的能力。垂直方向超分,可以理解是偏振位移器件输出的两帧图像在垂直方向上的间隔距离为Py/2;所述Py表示两帧图像的相邻像素在竖直方向的间距,从而实现垂直方向的分辨率翻倍。在采用垂直方向超分时,偏振位移器件需要具备实现偏移矢量为(0,Py/2)的能力。对角方向超分,可以理解是偏振位移器件输出的两帧图像在垂直方向上的间隔距离为Py/2,在水平方向上的间隔距离为Px/2;从而实现分辨率翻倍。在采用对角方向超分时,偏振位移器件需要具备实现偏移矢量为(Px/2,Py/2)的能力。参见图4所示,以4*4像素阵列为例(像素排列为RGB Stipe排列),假设偏振位移器件可以实现偏移矢量为(Px/2,Py/2)的偏移,那么通过时分复用的方式可以实现将等效的显示像素数翻倍的效果。当然偏振位移器件的偏移矢量是(Px/2,0)时,可以实现水平方向的分辨率翻倍。偏振位移器件的偏移矢量为(0,Py/2)时,实现竖直方向的分辨率倍增。当然也可以通过多个像素位置调整组件200串联实现多帧图像的偏移,实现大于2倍的分辨率提升。As an example, taking multiple frames of images as two frames of images as an example, using the display module provided by the embodiment of the present application can realize super resolution in the horizontal direction, or super resolution in the vertical direction, or super resolution in the diagonal direction. Horizontal direction super resolution, it can be understood that the distance between the two frames of images formed by the beam output by the polarization displacement device in the horizontal direction is Px/2; the Px represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the two frames of images in the horizontal direction, so as to realize The resolution in the horizontal direction is doubled. When super-resolution in the horizontal direction is used, the polarization shifting device needs to have the ability to realize the shift vector as (Px/2, 0). Vertical superresolution, it can be understood that the distance between the two frames of images output by the polarization displacement device in the vertical direction is Py/2; the Py represents the vertical distance between adjacent pixels of the two frames of images, so as to realize the vertical distance doubled the resolution. When super-resolution in the vertical direction is used, the polarization shifting device needs to have the ability to realize the shift vector to be (0, Py/2). Diagonal direction super resolution can be understood as the distance between two frames of images output by the polarization displacement device in the vertical direction is Py/2, and the distance in the horizontal direction is Px/2; thereby doubling the resolution. When super-resolution in the diagonal direction is used, the polarization shifting device needs to have the ability to realize the shift vector as (Px/2, Py/2). As shown in Figure 4, taking a 4*4 pixel array as an example (the pixel arrangement is RGB Stipe arrangement), assuming that the polarization displacement device can realize the offset of the offset vector as (Px/2, Py/2), then through time division multiplexing In this way, the effect of doubling the equivalent number of display pixels can be achieved. Of course, when the offset vector of the polarization shifting device is (Px/2,0), the resolution in the horizontal direction can be doubled. When the offset vector of the polarization displacement device is (0, Py/2), the resolution in the vertical direction is multiplied. Of course, multiple pixel position adjustment components 200 can also be connected in series to realize the offset of multiple frames of images, so as to achieve a resolution increase of more than 2 times.
示例性地,参见图3B所示。为了便于区分将两个像素位置调整组件分别称为第一像素位置调整组件200a和第二像素位置调整组件200b。将像素位置调整组件200a的偏振转换器称为第一偏振转换器210a,将像素位置调整组件200b的偏振转换器称为第二偏振转换器210b。将像素位置调整组件200a中的偏振位移器件称为第一偏振位移器件220a,将像素位置调整组件200b中的偏振位移器件称为第二偏振位移器件220b。For example, see Fig. 3B. In order to facilitate the distinction, the two pixel position adjustment components are respectively referred to as the first pixel position adjustment component 200a and the second pixel position adjustment component 200b. The polarization converter of the pixel position adjustment component 200a is called a first polarization converter 210a, and the polarization converter of the pixel position adjustment component 200b is called a second polarization converter 210b. The polarization displacement device in the pixel position adjustment component 200a is called the first polarization displacement device 220a, and the polarization displacement device in the pixel position adjustment component 200b is called the second polarization displacement device 220b.
下面对图3A和图3B中的各个功能组件和结构分别进行介绍说明,以给出示例性的具体实现方案。如下描述时,对显示模组中的各个组件的标号不再进行示例。Each functional component and structure in FIG. 3A and FIG. 3B are respectively introduced and described below to give an exemplary specific implementation solution. In the following description, the reference numerals of the components in the display module will not be exemplified.
偏振位移器件可以是偏振光栅或者双折射器件。The polarization shifting device may be a polarization grating or a birefringent device.
一种可能的示例中,以偏振位移器件220为偏振光栅为例。采用偏振光栅结合偏振调制器件的组合方式来实现分辨率增强。In a possible example, it is taken that the polarization displacement device 220 is a polarization grating as an example. A combination of polarization gratings and polarization modulation devices is used to achieve resolution enhancement.
偏振光栅,也可以称为Pancharatnam-Berry deflector(PBD),是一种衍射光学器件。偏振光栅利用几何相位产生周期性的相位光栅结构,从而在不同的圆偏振光入射下,可以分别产生不同方向的+1级和-1级的衍射。参见图5A所示,利用电控偏振调制器件改变显示屏输出的光束的偏振态,使得输入偏振光栅的光束发生偏转。以每个像素为矩形为例,P为相邻两个像素在水平方向的间距或者垂直方向的间距。例如,参见图5B所示,以对角超分为例,通过偏振转换器和偏振光栅实现将显示屏输出的图像中每个像素沿对角方向偏移
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000001
然后通过分时显示未经过偏移的图像和偏移后的图像,等效将显示屏显示图像的分辨率提升了2倍,偏移后的像素水平间隔为P/2。
A polarization grating, also known as a Pancharatnam-Berry deflector (PBD), is a diffractive optical device. The polarization grating uses the geometric phase to generate a periodic phase grating structure, so that under different incident circularly polarized light, it can generate +1 order and -1 order diffraction in different directions. As shown in FIG. 5A , the polarization state of the light beam output from the display screen is changed by using an electronically controlled polarization modulation device, so that the light beam input into the polarization grating is deflected. Taking each pixel as a rectangle as an example, P is the distance between two adjacent pixels in the horizontal direction or the distance in the vertical direction. For example, as shown in Figure 5B, taking diagonal super-resolution as an example, each pixel in the image output by the display screen is shifted diagonally through a polarization converter and a polarization grating
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000001
Then, by time-sharing displaying the unshifted image and the shifted image, the resolution of the displayed image on the display screen is equivalently increased by 2 times, and the horizontal interval of the shifted pixels is P/2.
另一种可能的示例中,偏振转换器和双折射器件的组合,用于将显示组件发出的承载图像的光线进行偏移。偏振转换器可以在控制组件的控制下分时调整输入的目标偏振光的偏振方向。目标偏振光用于承载低分辨率的图像。双折射器件在输入的偏振光的偏振方向不同时,输出目标偏振光的位置不同。比如,双折射器件在偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向时,在第一位置输出所述目标偏振光,在偏振转换器输出的目 标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向时,在第二位置输出所述目标偏振光,参见图6所示。需要说明的是,针对同一图像,比如多帧图像中的第一图像,显示组件显示该第一图像的时间,偏振转换器对承载该第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向调整时间同步。通过上述方式多帧低分辨率图像分时显示,利用人眼的视觉暂留和视觉合成功能,使得人眼看到的高分辨率的图像。In another possible example, a combination of a polarization converter and a birefringent element is used to deflect the image-bearing light emitted by the display assembly. The polarization converter can time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light under the control of the control component. Target polarized light is used to carry low-resolution images. When the polarization direction of the input polarized light of the birefringent device is different, the position of outputting the target polarized light is different. For example, when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the first polarization direction, the birefringent device outputs the target polarized light at the first position, and the target polarized light output by the polarization converter has the second polarization direction. When the polarization direction is selected, the target polarized light is output at the second position, as shown in FIG. 6 . It should be noted that, for the same image, such as the first image in multiple frames of images, the display component displays the time of the first image, and the polarization converter adjusts the time synchronization for the polarization direction of the target polarized light carrying the first image. Through the time-sharing display of multiple frames of low-resolution images in the above manner, the human eyes can see high-resolution images by using the persistence of vision and visual synthesis functions of the human eyes.
需要说明的是,由于偏振光栅是衍射器件,衍射器件具有固有的色散特性。光栅的偏转角度与输入光束的波长线性相关,从而导致显示屏发出的不同波长的红绿蓝光线经过偏振光栅后发生色散,导致达到人眼的成像效果较差,比如出现类似彩虹边的效果,使得人眼看到的图像较模糊,色彩失真。而双折射器件是非衍射器件,不具有固有的色散特性,从而经过双折射器件后的光线不会发生色散,相比偏振光栅,成像效果更好。It should be noted that since the polarization grating is a diffraction device, the diffraction device has inherent dispersion characteristics. The deflection angle of the grating is linearly related to the wavelength of the input beam, which leads to the dispersion of the red, green, and blue rays of different wavelengths emitted by the display screen after passing through the polarization grating, resulting in poor imaging effects for the human eye, such as rainbow edge effects, The image seen by the human eye is blurred and the color is distorted. The birefringent device is a non-diffractive device and does not have inherent dispersion characteristics, so the light after passing through the birefringent device will not be dispersed, and the imaging effect is better than that of the polarization grating.
显示组件可以是普通的液晶显示器(liquid crystal display,LCD)、普通有机发光二极管显示器(organic light emitting diode,OLED)或者硅基OLED,或者其他显示设备,本申请对此不作具体限定。The display component may be an ordinary liquid crystal display (liquid crystal display, LCD), an ordinary organic light emitting diode display (organic light emitting diode, OLED) or a silicon-based OLED, or other display devices, which are not specifically limited in this application.
偏振转换器可以是电控偏振转换器(electronically controlled polarization switch,ECPS)。示例性地,电控偏振转换器可以为向列相液晶(nematic liquid crystals)、正交排列(vertical alignment,VA)液晶、平板转换(in-plane switching,IPS)液晶、电控扭曲向列型液晶(twisted nematic liquid crystals,TNLC)、电控非线性晶体或者电控铁电液晶中任一项。The polarization switch may be an electronically controlled polarization switch (ECPS). Exemplarily, the electronically controlled polarization converter can be nematic liquid crystals (nematic liquid crystals), vertical alignment (vertical alignment, VA) liquid crystals, plate switching (in-plane switching, IPS) liquid crystals, electronically controlled twisted nematic Any of twisted nematic liquid crystals (TNLC), electrically controlled nonlinear crystals or electrically controlled ferroelectric liquid crystals.
一种可能的示例中,控制组件控制偏振转换器处于未加电(即关闭OFF)的情况下,用于保持输入的偏振光的偏振方向,可以理解为输入的偏振光与输出的偏振光的偏振方向相同,或者理解为偏振转换器仅透射输入的偏振光。需要说明的是,光束在通过某个光组件透射时,可能会存在能量损失,但是光束中携带的信息并未发生变化,基于此本申请实施例将仅做透射处理的输入偏振光和输出偏振光认为是同一偏振光。控制组件控制偏振转换器处于加电的情况下,比如施加电压超过阈值电压Vc,用于对输入的偏振光的偏振方向进行旋转处理,比如将输入的偏振光的偏振方向旋转90度。In a possible example, the control component controls the polarization converter to keep the polarization direction of the input polarized light when it is not powered (that is, OFF), which can be understood as the difference between the input polarized light and the output polarized light The polarization direction is the same, or it is understood that the polarization converter only transmits the input polarized light. It should be noted that when a light beam is transmitted through a certain optical component, there may be energy loss, but the information carried in the light beam has not changed. Based on this, the embodiment of this application will only transmit the input polarized light and the output polarized light. The light is considered to be the same polarized light. The control component controls the polarization converter to be powered on, for example, the applied voltage exceeds the threshold voltage Vc, and is used to rotate the polarization direction of the input polarized light, for example, rotate the polarization direction of the input polarized light by 90 degrees.
另一种可能的示例中,控制组件控制偏振转换器处于加电的情况下,比如施加电压超过阈值电压,用于保持输入的偏振光的偏振方向。控制组件控制偏振转换器处于未加电的情况下,用于对输入的偏振光的偏振方向进行旋转处理,比如将输入的偏振光的偏振方向旋转90度。In another possible example, the control component controls the polarization converter to be powered on, for example, the applied voltage exceeds a threshold voltage, so as to maintain the polarization direction of the input polarized light. The control component controls the polarization converter to rotate the polarization direction of the input polarized light when it is not powered on, for example, to rotate the polarization direction of the input polarized light by 90 degrees.
以TNLC为例,TNLC由两片导电衬底中间夹一个液晶层组成。在TNLC未加电时,穿过TNLC的入射偏振光的偏振方向旋转90度;在扭曲向列型液晶施加电压超过阈值电压Vc,TNLC中的液晶分子竖立起来,则穿过TNLC的入射偏振光的偏振方向保持不变,仍然发射出与该入射偏振光相同偏振态的偏振光。如果施加电压位于0到Vc之间,那么入射偏振光束经过TNLC后偏振方向将旋转0~90度,具体旋转角度与所施加的电压以及TNLC的具体材料有关。Taking TNLC as an example, TNLC is composed of a liquid crystal layer sandwiched between two conductive substrates. When the TNLC is not powered on, the polarization direction of the incident polarized light passing through the TNLC is rotated by 90 degrees; when the voltage applied to the twisted nematic liquid crystal exceeds the threshold voltage Vc, the liquid crystal molecules in the TNLC stand up, and the incident polarized light passing through the TNLC The polarization direction remains unchanged, and the same polarization state as the incident polarized light is still emitted. If the applied voltage is between 0 and Vc, the polarization direction of the incident polarized beam will be rotated by 0-90 degrees after passing through the TNLC, and the specific rotation angle is related to the applied voltage and the specific material of the TNLC.
在一种可能的实现方式中,控制组件,例如可以是处理器、微处理器、控制器等控制组件,例如可以是通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),通用处理器,数字信号处理(digital signal processing,DSP),专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuits,ASIC),现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。In a possible implementation, the control component can be, for example, a processor, a microprocessor, a controller and other control components, for example, it can be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processing (digital signal processing, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any combination thereof .
如下针对双折射器件的结构进行描述。在描述双折射器件的结构描述之前,先对双折 射器件的原理进行描述。参见图7所示,为双折射器件的原理示意图。双折射器件的光轴位于面内,即与纸面相平行的方向。双折射器件根据入射光的偏振方向的不同,输出的光可以分为o光和e光。o光可以称为寻常光,偏振方向垂直于入射面。e光也可以称为非寻常光,偏振方向位于入射面内。The following describes the structure of the birefringent device. Before describing the structural description of the birefringent device, the principle of the birefringent device will be described first. Referring to FIG. 7 , it is a schematic diagram of the principle of a birefringent device. The optical axis of the birefringent device lies in-plane, that is, the direction parallel to the plane of the paper. According to the different polarization directions of the incident light, the output light of the birefringent device can be divided into o light and e light. o Light can be called ordinary light, the polarization direction is perpendicular to the plane of incidence. e-ray can also be called extraordinary light, and the polarization direction is located in the plane of incidence.
由于o光和e光在双折射器件中传输的折射率不同,它们在经过双折射器件后会发生偏移,比如位移量为a。位移量a的数值大小与双折射器件的规格有关。位移量a的数值大小与双折射器件的厚度以及夹角θ有关,夹角θ是双折射器件光轴与双折射器件表面法线的夹角。例如,位移量a满足如下公式(1)所示的条件:Since o light and e light have different refractive indices transmitted in the birefringent device, they will be shifted after passing through the birefringent device, for example, the shift amount is a. The value of the displacement a is related to the specifications of the birefringent device. The value of the displacement a is related to the thickness of the birefringent device and the included angle θ, which is the included angle between the optical axis of the birefringent device and the normal line of the surface of the birefringent device. For example, the displacement a satisfies the conditions shown in the following formula (1):
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000002
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000002
其中,T表示双折射器件的厚度,n o表示o光的折射率,n e表示e光的折射率。 Among them, T represents the thickness of the birefringent device, n o represents the refractive index of o light, ne represents the refractive index of e light.
基于如上公式(1)可以看出,在实现同样位移量a的情况下,双折射器件的厚度越小,则双折射器件的o光和e光的折射率差Δn越大。示例性地,双折射器件的厚度与双折射器件o光和e光的折射率差Δn的关系,参见图8所示,图8中以θ=45°为例。申请人通过研究发现,在θ=45°附近时,同等折射率差Δn的情况下,双折射器件的厚度最小。Based on the above formula (1), it can be seen that in the case of achieving the same displacement a, the smaller the thickness of the birefringent device, the larger the refractive index difference Δn between the o-light and e-light of the birefringent device. Exemplarily, the relationship between the thickness of the birefringent device and the refractive index difference Δn between o-light and e-light of the birefringent device is shown in FIG. 8 , where θ=45° is taken as an example. The applicant found through research that, when θ=45°, the thickness of the birefringent device is the smallest under the same refractive index difference Δn.
双折射器件可以采用晶体,比如石英晶体、硼酸钡晶体、石英晶体、铌酸锂晶体或者二氧化钛晶体等晶体。一般来说晶体的双折射率较小,导致VR设备或者AR设备体积较大。本申请实施例可以将液晶作为双折射器件的材料,利用液晶材料较大的双折射率使得制作的双折射器件的厚度较小,能够更好的放置在空间受限的VR设备或者AR设备中。示例性地,所述液晶材料可以采用液态的液晶材料也可以采用紫外固化或者热固化的液晶聚合物材料。The birefringent device can use crystals, such as quartz crystals, barium borate crystals, quartz crystals, lithium niobate crystals, or titanium dioxide crystals. Generally speaking, the birefringence of the crystal is small, resulting in a larger volume of the VR device or the AR device. In the embodiment of the present application, liquid crystal can be used as the material of the birefringent device, and the larger birefringence index of the liquid crystal material can be used to make the birefringent device thinner, which can be better placed in a VR device or an AR device with limited space. . Exemplarily, the liquid crystal material may be a liquid liquid crystal material or a liquid crystal polymer material cured by ultraviolet or heat.
在一种可能的实施方式中,显示模组中还可以包括折叠光路,参见图9所示,以偏振位移器件为双折射器件为例。显示模组按照光束传输方向依次包括显示组件、偏振转换器、双折射器件以及折叠光路。折叠光路用于将双折射器件输出的光束入射至人眼。示例性地,折叠光路包括一片半透半反镜、一片反射偏振片,一片或多片成像透镜和多片相位膜。相位模可以用于改变入射光的偏振态。成像透镜可以是单片的球面透镜或非球面透镜,也可以是多片球面或非球面透镜的组合,其中多片球面或非球面透镜的组合可以提高系统的成像质量,降低系统的像差。本申请还可以采用其他结构的光路来将双折射器件输出的光束入射到人眼,本申请实施例对此不作具体限定。In a possible implementation manner, the display module may further include a folded optical path, as shown in FIG. 9 , where the polarization shifting device is a birefringent device as an example. The display module sequentially includes a display component, a polarization converter, a birefringent device and a folded optical path according to the beam transmission direction. The folded light path is used to make the light beam output by the birefringent device incident on the human eye. Exemplarily, the folded optical path includes a half mirror, a reflective polarizer, one or more imaging lenses and multiple phase films. Phase modes can be used to change the polarization state of incident light. The imaging lens can be a single spherical lens or an aspheric lens, or a combination of multiple spherical or aspheric lenses. The combination of multiple spherical or aspherical lenses can improve the imaging quality of the system and reduce the aberration of the system. The present application may also use an optical path with other structures to make the light beam output by the birefringent device incident on the human eye, which is not specifically limited in this embodiment of the present application.
一些实施例中,待显示图像被分解为多帧低分辨率图像。在一种可能的实施方式中,在将待显示图像分解为多帧低分辨率图像时,可以采用亚像素采样的方式获得多帧图像,即将像素单元中的每一个亚像素当作一个单独的像素参与采样,然后计算每帧图像中每个像素点的亚像素的像素值以获得多帧低分辨率图像,比如可以采用SPR方式来确定。在进行亚像素采样时,可以从相邻的多个像素点采样亚像素作为一个像素点的亚像素。In some embodiments, the image to be displayed is decomposed into multiple frames of low-resolution images. In a possible implementation, when the image to be displayed is decomposed into multiple frames of low-resolution images, the multiple frames of images can be obtained by sub-pixel sampling, that is, each sub-pixel in the pixel unit is regarded as a separate Pixels participate in sampling, and then calculate the sub-pixel pixel value of each pixel in each frame of image to obtain multiple frames of low-resolution images, for example, it can be determined by SPR. When sub-pixel sampling is performed, sub-pixels may be sampled from multiple adjacent pixel points as a sub-pixel of one pixel point.
示例性地,参见图10所示,以RGB Stipe排列为例。以一条斜线为例,参见图10中(a)所示为采用像素单元采样概念示意图,参见图10中(b)所示为采用亚像素采样概念示意图。图10中(c)中以红色亚像素、绿色亚像素和蓝色亚像素间隔采用为例的采样示意图。从图10中可以看出,采用亚像素采样之后,斜线会更加平滑,锯齿感会变弱。需要说明的是,在显示组件采用不同的亚像素排列方式时,利用本申请实施例提供的方案,能够提升的最大分辨率倍数可能不同,例如参见表1所示。Exemplarily, see FIG. 10 , taking the RGB Stipe arrangement as an example. Taking a slanted line as an example, see (a) in FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the concept of sampling by pixel unit, and (b) in FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram of the concept of sampling by sub-pixel. In (c) of FIG. 10 , a schematic diagram of sampling is taken as an example of the spacing between red sub-pixels, green sub-pixels and blue sub-pixels. It can be seen from Figure 10 that after using sub-pixel sampling, the oblique lines will be smoother and the jaggedness will be weakened. It should be noted that when the display components adopt different arrangements of sub-pixels, the maximum resolution multiples that can be improved by using the solutions provided in the embodiments of the present application may be different, as shown in Table 1, for example.
表1Table 1
亚像素排列sub-pixel arrangement RGB StipeRGB Stipe Pentile RGBPentile RGB Pentile RGBWPentile RGBW Delta RGBDelta RGB
每个像素单元中亚像素数目Number of sub-pixels per pixel unit 33 22 44 22
最大分辨率提升倍数Maximum resolution increase multiple 33 22 44 22
以多帧图像中的第一图像为例。第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从待显示图像包括的相邻至少h个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的。h表示待显示图像需要分解的低分辨率图像的数量。Take the first image in the multi-frame images as an example. The sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in at least h adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed. h represents the number of low-resolution images that need to be decomposed for the image to be displayed.
举例来说,分解的低分辨率图像数量为2。比如在实现对角超分时,图像源(分辨率为P×Q)经过重采样处理得到待显示图像,待显示图像的分辨率为2M×2N,显示组件的分辨率为M×N(P>M,Q>N),可以每相邻的4个像素点采集多个亚像素构成一个低分辨率图像的亚像素。比如两帧低分辨率图像包括第一图像和第二图像。第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从所述待显示图像中邻接的4个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;第二图像中的第二像素点包括的亚像素是从邻接的4个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;第一像素点在第一图像中的位置坐标与第二像素点在所述第二图像中的位置坐标相同。以采用RGB Stipe排列方式为例。示例性地,可以通过亚像素间隔采样的方式,将待显示图像分解为两个图像。比如,参见图11A所示,图11A中(a)表示采样之前的待显示图像,图11A中(b)表示采样后低分辨率图像子帧1,图11A中(c)表示采样后低分辨率图像子帧2。可以理解的是,图11A中(b)中每个加粗矩形框中包括的R亚像素、G亚像素和B亚像素作为一个子帧1的一个像素点。应理解的是,图11A仅作为一种示例,并不对采样方式进行具体限定。再比如,参见图11B所示,图11B中(a)表示采样之前的待显示图像,图11B中(b)表示采样后低分辨率图像子帧1,图11B中(c)表示采样后低分辨率图像子帧2。可以理解的是,图11B中(b)中每个加粗矩形框中包括的R亚像素、G亚像素和B亚像素作为一个子帧1的一个像素点。For example, the number of low-resolution images decomposed is 2. For example, when implementing diagonal super-resolution, the image source (with a resolution of P×Q) is resampled to obtain the image to be displayed. The resolution of the image to be displayed is 2M×2N, and the resolution of the display component is M×N (P >M, Q>N), multiple sub-pixels can be collected for each adjacent 4 pixels to form a sub-pixel of a low-resolution image. For example, two frames of low-resolution images include a first image and a second image. The sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in the 4 adjacent pixels in the image to be displayed; the sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are It is obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in four adjacent pixel points; the position coordinates of the first pixel point in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel point in the second image. Take the RGB Stipe arrangement as an example. Exemplarily, the image to be displayed may be decomposed into two images by sub-pixel interval sampling. For example, referring to Figure 11A, (a) in Figure 11A represents the image to be displayed before sampling, (b) in Figure 11A represents the low-resolution image subframe 1 after sampling, and (c) in Figure 11A represents the low-resolution image after sampling Rate image subframe 2. It can be understood that, the R sub-pixel, the G sub-pixel and the B sub-pixel included in each thickened rectangular box in (b) of FIG. 11A are regarded as a pixel point of a sub-frame 1 . It should be understood that FIG. 11A is only used as an example, and does not specifically limit the sampling manner. For another example, referring to Fig. 11B, (a) in Fig. 11B represents the image to be displayed before sampling, (b) in Fig. 11B represents the low-resolution image subframe 1 after sampling, and (c) in Fig. 11B represents the low-resolution image after sampling. Resolution image subframe 2. It can be understood that, the R sub-pixel, the G sub-pixel and the B sub-pixel included in each thickened rectangular box in (b) of FIG. 11B are regarded as a pixel point of a sub-frame 1 .
再比如,在实现水平超分时,图像源(分辨率为P×Q)经过重采样处理得到待显示图像,待显示图像的分辨率为2M×N,显示组件的分辨率为M×N,可以每水平相邻的2个像素点采集多个亚像素构成一个低分辨率图像的亚像素。再比如,分辨率提升倍数为2,在实现垂直超分时,图像源(分辨率为P×Q)经过重采样处理得到待显示图像,待显示图像的分辨率为M×2N,显示组件的分辨率为M×N,可以每垂直方向上相邻的2个像素点采集多个亚像素构成一个低分辨率图像的亚像素。以采用RGB Stipe排列方式为例。以采用RGB Stipe排列方式为例。可以通过亚像素间隔采样的方式,将待显示图像分解为两个图像。比如,参见图12所示,图12中(a)表示采样之前的待显示图像,图12中(b)表示采样后低分辨率图像子帧1,图12中(c)表示采样后低分辨率图像子帧2。应理解的是,图12仅作为一种示例。For another example, when implementing horizontal super-resolution, the image source (with a resolution of P×Q) is resampled to obtain the image to be displayed. The resolution of the image to be displayed is 2M×N, and the resolution of the display component is M×N. A plurality of sub-pixels can be collected for every two horizontally adjacent pixels to form a sub-pixel of a low-resolution image. For another example, the resolution increase factor is 2. When realizing vertical super-resolution, the image source (with a resolution of P×Q) is resampled to obtain the image to be displayed. The resolution of the image to be displayed is M×2N, and the display component The resolution is M×N, and multiple sub-pixels can be collected for every 2 adjacent pixels in the vertical direction to form a sub-pixel of a low-resolution image. Take the RGB Stipe arrangement as an example. Take the RGB Stipe arrangement as an example. The image to be displayed can be decomposed into two images by sub-pixel interval sampling. For example, as shown in Figure 12, (a) in Figure 12 represents the image to be displayed before sampling, (b) in Figure 12 represents the low-resolution image subframe 1 after sampling, and (c) in Figure 12 represents the low-resolution image after sampling Rate image subframe 2. It should be understood that Fig. 12 is only used as an example.
再举例来说,分解的低分辨率图像数量为4。比如同时实现水平超分、垂直超分和对角超分时,图像源(分辨率为P×Q)经过重采样处理得到待显示图像,待显示图像的分辨率为2M×2N,显示组件的分辨率为M×N,可以每邻接的4个像素点采集多个亚像素构成一个低分辨率图像的像素点。As another example, the number of decomposed low-resolution images is four. For example, when realizing horizontal super-resolution, vertical super-resolution and diagonal super-resolution at the same time, the image source (with a resolution of P×Q) is resampled to obtain the image to be displayed. The resolution of the image to be displayed is 2M×2N, and the display component The resolution is M×N, and multiple sub-pixels can be collected for each adjacent 4 pixels to form pixels of a low-resolution image.
需要说明的是,如果图像源的分辨率不是kM×LN,可以先对图像源进行重采样处理获得待显示图像的分辨率为kM×LN。其中k为正整数,L为正整数,k和L的具体数值 由系统具体的分辨率增强倍数以及超分方向决定。比如需要实现对角方向的分辨率倍增时,k=2,L=2。一些实施例中,图像源的分辨率为kM×LN,即图像源即为待显示图像。一种可能的示例中,控制组件获得待显示图像,然后将待显示图像分时发送给显示组件。比如控制组件获得图像源后,根据图像源的分辨率和显示组件的分辨率对图像源进行处理,获得多帧低分辨率图像。另一种可能的示例中,可以由与显示设备(比如AR设备或者VR设备)的移动终端来获得待显示图像,比如移动终端根据图像源的分辨率和显示组件的分辨率来获得待显示图像。然后由移动终端将待显示图像发送给控制组件。又一种可能的示例中,可以由与AR设备或者VR设备连接的移动终端来获得待显示图像,比如移动终端根据图像源的分辨率和显示组件的分辨率来获得待显示图像。然后由移动终端将待显示图像分解为多帧低分辨率图像,然后发送给控制组件,并向控制组件发送控制信号,指示显示组件的显示多帧低分辨率图像的显示信号。移动终端比如可以是手机、平板电脑或者个人计算机(person computer,PC)等。It should be noted that if the resolution of the image source is not kM×LN, the image source may be resampled first to obtain the resolution of the image to be displayed as kM×LN. Where k is a positive integer, L is a positive integer, and the specific values of k and L are determined by the specific resolution enhancement multiple and super-resolution direction of the system. For example, when resolution doubling in the diagonal direction needs to be realized, k=2, L=2. In some embodiments, the resolution of the image source is kM×LN, that is, the image source is the image to be displayed. In a possible example, the control component obtains the image to be displayed, and then sends the image to be displayed to the display component in time division. For example, after the control component obtains the image source, it processes the image source according to the resolution of the image source and the resolution of the display component to obtain multiple frames of low-resolution images. In another possible example, the image to be displayed can be obtained by a mobile terminal connected to a display device (such as an AR device or a VR device), for example, the mobile terminal obtains the image to be displayed according to the resolution of the image source and the resolution of the display component . Then the mobile terminal sends the image to be displayed to the control component. In another possible example, the image to be displayed may be obtained by a mobile terminal connected to the AR device or VR device, for example, the mobile terminal obtains the image to be displayed according to the resolution of the image source and the resolution of the display component. Then the mobile terminal decomposes the image to be displayed into multiple frames of low-resolution images, and then sends them to the control component, and sends a control signal to the control component, instructing the display component to display the display signal of multiple frames of low-resolution images. The mobile terminal may be, for example, a mobile phone, a tablet computer, or a personal computer (person computer, PC).
如下以像素位置调整组件包括偏振转换器和双折射器件为例进行描述,参见图3A和图3B所示。像素位置调整组件采用其它的结构时实现方式与采用偏振转换器和双折射器件的实现方式类似,本申请不再赘述。The following description will be made by taking the pixel position adjustment component including a polarization converter and a birefringent device as an example, as shown in FIG. 3A and FIG. 3B . When the pixel position adjustment component adopts other structures, the implementation manner is similar to the implementation manner using the polarization converter and the birefringent device, and will not be repeated in this application.
如下结合图3A所示的显示模组的结构对本申请实施例提供的方案进行描述。以分辨率提升倍数为2倍为例。本申请实施中控制组件或者终端设备可以将待显示图像分解为两帧低分辨率图像。本实施例中以实现对角超分为例。子帧分时显示,控制组件同步地发送调制信号到偏振转换器,以及发送显示信号到显示组件。比如在T0时刻,参见图13所示,发送高电平交流信号到偏振转换器,同步地发送低分辨率图像子帧1到显示组件。以偏振转换器为TNLC为例,在T0时刻,参见图14所示,偏振转换器对输入的目标偏振光的偏振方向不作转换处理,使得双折射器件发射O光,即不对输入的目标光束进行位置偏移,参见图13所示。在T1时刻,参见图13所示,控制组件发送低电平交流信号到偏振转换器,同步地发送低分辨率图像子帧1到显示组件,在T1时刻,偏振转换器对输入的目标偏振光的偏振方向进行转换处理,使得双折射器件发射e光,即对输入的目标光束进行位置偏移,参见图13所示。比如,通过光路传输到人眼的图像相当于低分辨率图像子帧1和低分辨率图像子帧2的叠加,参见图15所示。图15中每个加粗的黑色框表示一个像素。The solution provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described below in conjunction with the structure of the display module shown in FIG. 3A . Take the resolution increase factor of 2 times as an example. In the implementation of the present application, the control component or the terminal device may decompose the image to be displayed into two frames of low-resolution images. In this embodiment, the implementation of diagonal super-division is taken as an example. For time-sharing display of sub-frames, the control component synchronously sends modulation signals to the polarization converter, and sends display signals to the display component. For example, at time T0, as shown in FIG. 13 , a high-level AC signal is sent to the polarization converter, and a low-resolution image sub-frame 1 is sent to the display component synchronously. Taking the polarization converter as TNLC as an example, at time T0, as shown in Figure 14, the polarization converter does not convert the polarization direction of the input target polarized light, so that the birefringent device emits O light, that is, does not perform any conversion on the input target beam. Position offset, see Figure 13. At time T1, as shown in Figure 13, the control component sends a low-level AC signal to the polarization converter, and synchronously sends the low-resolution image subframe 1 to the display component. The polarization direction of the birefringent device is transformed to make the birefringent device emit e-light, that is, the position of the input target beam is shifted, as shown in FIG. 13 . For example, the image transmitted to the human eye through the optical path is equivalent to the superposition of the low-resolution image subframe 1 and the low-resolution image subframe 2, as shown in FIG. 15 . Each bold black box in Figure 15 represents a pixel.
利用上述方法,可以实现将显示组件的等效分辨率提升2倍,当然,更高倍数的分辨率提升也可以是实现,但是需要多组的偏振转换器和双折射器件的组合。通过控制双折射器件和显示组件之间的方位角,可以实现水平,竖直和任意方向上的分辨率增强。本申请的分辨率增强算法采用了分时显示低分辨率图像,利用人眼的视觉暂留和视觉合成功能,在脑海中合成高分辨率的图像,因而合成的高分辨率图像的帧率相对于显示组件的最高帧率有一定比例的降低。Using the above method, the equivalent resolution of the display component can be increased by 2 times. Of course, a higher multiple of resolution can also be achieved, but the combination of multiple sets of polarization converters and birefringent devices is required. Resolution enhancement in horizontal, vertical and arbitrary directions can be achieved by controlling the azimuth angle between the birefringent device and the display assembly. The resolution enhancement algorithm of the present application adopts the time-sharing display of low-resolution images, utilizes the visual persistence and visual synthesis functions of the human eye, and synthesizes high-resolution images in the mind, so the frame rate of the synthesized high-resolution images is relatively low. The maximum frame rate of the display component is reduced by a certain percentage.
作为另一种举例,以采用RGB Stipe排列方式为例,显示模组的结构以图3B为例。本申请实施中控制组件或者终端设备可以将待显示图像分解为4帧低分辨率图像。示例性地,第一像素位置调整组件和第二像素位置调整组件结合来实现水平方向超分、垂直方向超分和对角方向超分。一些实施例中,显示组件的分辨率为M×N。如果图像源的分辨率不为2M×2N时,可以将图像源进行重采样获得待显示图像,使得待显示图像的分辨率为2M×2N。在分解待显示图像时,可以先通过采样的方式采集4帧图像,然后再进一步计算每帧图像中每个像素点的亚像素的像素值,比如可以采用SPR方式来确定。以一帧图像 为例,该帧图像的一个像素点的亚像素值可以从邻接的4个像素点包括的亚像素中采样获得的。示例性地,采用亚像素采样的方式,将待显示图像分解为4帧图像。比如,参见图16A所示,图16A中(a)表示采样之前的待显示图像,图16A中(b)-(e)表示采样后低分辨率图像子帧1-子帧4。图16A仅作为一种示例,并不对具体采样方式进行具体限定。再比如,参见图16B所示,图16B中(a)表示采样之前的待显示图像,图16B中(b)-(e)表示采样后低分辨率图像子帧1-子帧4。图16B仅作为一种示例,并不对具体采样方式进行具体限定。As another example, taking the arrangement of RGB Stipe as an example, the structure of the display module is shown in FIG. 3B as an example. In the implementation of the present application, the control component or the terminal device may decompose the image to be displayed into 4 frames of low-resolution images. Exemplarily, the first pixel position adjustment component and the second pixel position adjustment component are combined to implement horizontal super-resolution, vertical super-resolution and diagonal super-resolution. In some embodiments, the resolution of the display element is M×N. If the resolution of the image source is not 2M×2N, the image source may be resampled to obtain the image to be displayed, so that the resolution of the image to be displayed is 2M×2N. When decomposing the image to be displayed, 4 frames of images can be collected by sampling first, and then the pixel value of each pixel in each frame of the image can be further calculated, for example, it can be determined by SPR. Taking a frame of image as an example, the sub-pixel value of a pixel in the frame of image can be obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in 4 adjacent pixels. Exemplarily, the image to be displayed is decomposed into 4 frames of images by sub-pixel sampling. For example, referring to FIG. 16A , (a) in FIG. 16A represents the image to be displayed before sampling, and (b)-(e) in FIG. 16A represent low-resolution image subframe 1-subframe 4 after sampling. FIG. 16A is only an example, and does not specifically limit the specific sampling manner. For another example, referring to FIG. 16B , (a) in FIG. 16B represents the image to be displayed before sampling, and (b)-(e) in FIG. 16B represent low-resolution image subframe 1-subframe 4 after sampling. FIG. 16B is only used as an example, and does not specifically limit the specific sampling manner.
应该理解的是,第二双折射器件的O光轴与第一双折射器件的O光轴重合,第二双折射器件的e光轴与第一双折射器件的e光轴垂直。作为一种举例,参见表2所示。以偏振转换器在处于关闭OFF时,偏振转换器对输入的目标偏振光的偏振方向不作转换处理,使得双折射器件发射O光,即不对输入的目标光束进行位置偏移。偏振转换器在处于开启ON时,偏振转换器对输入对的目标偏振光的偏振方向进行转换处理,使得双折射器件发射e光。第一双折射器件在发射e光时,对目标光束进行水平方向偏移,第二双折射器件在发射e光时,对目标光束进行垂直方向偏移。参见表2所示。在第一时间单元内,控制组件控制显示组件显示子帧1,控制第一偏振转换器处于ON状态,控制第二偏振转换器处于OFF状态。可以理解为,控制组件在T0时刻,控制显示组件开始显示子帧1,向第一偏振转换器和第二偏振转换器发送高电平调制信号。从而使得承载子帧1的目标偏振光经过第一双折器件和第二双折射器件后未发生光束偏移。在第二时间单元内,即T1时刻到达时,控制组件控制显示组件显示子帧2,控制第一偏振转换器处于OFF状态,控制第二偏振转换器处于ON状态。可以理解为,控制组件在T1时刻,控制显示组件开始显示子帧2,向第一偏振转换器发送低电平调制信号,以及向第二偏振转换器发送高电平调制信号。从而使得承载子帧2的目标偏振光经过第一双折射器件发生光束水平偏移,再经过第二双折射器件后不再继续光束偏移。可以理解为,承载子帧2的目标偏振光经过第一双折射器件和第二双折射器件后发生光束水平偏移。在第三时间单元内,即T2时刻到达时,控制组件控制显示组件显示子帧3,控制第一偏振转换器处于ON状态,控制第二偏振转换器处于OFF状态。可以理解为,控制组件在T2时刻,控制显示组件开始显示子帧3,向第一偏振转换器发送高电平调制信号,以及向第二偏振转换器发送低电平调制信号。从而使得承载子帧3的目标偏振光经过第一双折射器件未发生光束偏移,再经过第二双折射器件后发生光束垂直偏移。可以理解为,承载子帧3的目标偏振光经过第一双折射器件和第二双折射器件后发生光束垂直偏移。在第四时间单元内,即T4时刻到达时,控制组件控制显示组件显示子帧4,控制第一偏振转换器处于OFF状态,控制第二偏振转换器处于OFF状态。可以理解为,控制组件在T3时刻,控制显示组件开始显示子帧4,向第一偏振转换器发送高电平调制信号,以及向第二偏振转换器发送高电平调制信号。从而使得承载子帧4的目标偏振光经过第一双折射器件发生光束水平偏移,再经过第二双折射器件后继续发生光束垂直偏移。可以理解为,承载子帧4的目标偏振光经过第一双折射器件和第二双折射器件后发生光束对角偏移。进而通过光路传输到人眼的图像相当于低分辨率图像子帧1-低分辨率图像子帧4的叠加,参见图17所示。4个箭头上方大小的低分辨率图像子帧经过叠加后得到箭头下方的效果。可以看出分辨率提高了4倍。It should be understood that the O optical axis of the second birefringent device coincides with the O optical axis of the first birefringent device, and the e optical axis of the second birefringent device is perpendicular to the e optical axis of the first birefringent device. As an example, see Table 2. When the polarization converter is OFF, the polarization converter does not convert the polarization direction of the input target polarized light, so that the birefringent device emits O light, that is, does not shift the position of the input target beam. When the polarization converter is turned ON, the polarization converter converts the polarization direction of the target polarized light of the input pair, so that the birefringent device emits e-light. When the first birefringent device emits e-ray, it shifts the target beam horizontally, and when the second birefringent device emits e-ray, it shifts the target beam vertically. See Table 2. In the first time unit, the control component controls the display component to display subframe 1, controls the first polarization converter to be in an ON state, and controls the second polarization converter to be in an OFF state. It can be understood that, at time T0, the control component controls the display component to start displaying subframe 1, and sends high-level modulation signals to the first polarization converter and the second polarization converter. Therefore, the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 1 does not shift after passing through the first birefringent device and the second birefringent device. In the second time unit, that is, when time T1 arrives, the control component controls the display component to display the subframe 2, controls the first polarization converter to be in the OFF state, and controls the second polarization converter to be in the ON state. It can be understood that, at time T1, the control component controls the display component to start displaying subframe 2, sends a low-level modulation signal to the first polarization converter, and sends a high-level modulation signal to the second polarization converter. Therefore, the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 2 is shifted horizontally after passing through the first birefringent device, and the beam does not continue to shift after passing through the second birefringent device. It can be understood that the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 2 is shifted horizontally after passing through the first birefringent device and the second birefringent device. In the third time unit, that is, when time T2 arrives, the control component controls the display component to display the subframe 3 , controls the first polarization converter to be in the ON state, and controls the second polarization converter to be in the OFF state. It can be understood that, at time T2, the control component controls the display component to start displaying subframe 3, sends a high-level modulation signal to the first polarization converter, and sends a low-level modulation signal to the second polarization converter. Therefore, the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 3 passes through the first birefringent device without beam shift, and then passes through the second birefringent device and then undergoes a vertical shift of the beam. It can be understood that the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 3 is vertically shifted after passing through the first birefringent device and the second birefringent device. In the fourth time unit, that is, when time T4 arrives, the control component controls the display component to display the subframe 4, controls the first polarization converter to be in the OFF state, and controls the second polarization converter to be in the OFF state. It can be understood that, at time T3, the control component controls the display component to start displaying subframe 4, sends a high-level modulation signal to the first polarization converter, and sends a high-level modulation signal to the second polarization converter. Therefore, the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 4 is horizontally shifted through the first birefringent device, and then continues to be vertically shifted after passing through the second birefringent device. It can be understood that the target polarized light carrying the sub-frame 4 is diagonally shifted after passing through the first birefringent device and the second birefringent device. Furthermore, the image transmitted to the human eye through the optical path is equivalent to the superimposition of the low-resolution image subframe 1-low-resolution image subframe 4, as shown in FIG. 17 . The 4 low-resolution image subframes of the size above the arrow are superimposed to obtain the effect below the arrow. It can be seen that the resolution has been increased by a factor of 4.
需要说明的是,本申请实施例中显示子帧1-子帧4的先后顺序不作具体限定。It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present application, the order of displaying subframe 1 to subframe 4 is not specifically limited.
表2Table 2
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000003
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000003
利用上述方法,可以实现将显示组件的等效分辨率提升4倍,本申请实施例中通过控制双折射器件和显示组件之间的方位角,可以实现水平,竖直和任意方向上的分辨率增强。本申请的分辨率增强算法采用了分时显示低分辨率图像,利用人眼的视觉暂留和视觉合成功能,在脑海中合成高分辨率的图像,因而合成的高分辨率图像的帧率相对于显示组件的最高帧率有一定比例的降低。Using the above method, the equivalent resolution of the display component can be increased by 4 times. In the embodiment of the present application, by controlling the azimuth angle between the birefringent device and the display component, the resolution in horizontal, vertical and arbitrary directions can be achieved enhanced. The resolution enhancement algorithm of the present application adopts the time-sharing display of low-resolution images, utilizes the visual persistence and visual synthesis functions of the human eye, and synthesizes high-resolution images in the mind, so the frame rate of the synthesized high-resolution images is relatively low. The maximum frame rate of the display component is reduced by a certain percentage.
本申请实施例采用亚像素级分解方式对待显示图像进行拆分,在采用亚像素采样之后,边缘会更加平滑,锯齿感会变弱,但是可能会有色边问题的出现。基于此,为了减弱色边,本申请实施例提供一种亚像素渲染(sub pixel rendering,SPR)方式来对采样的每个亚像素的像素值。在确定采样的亚像素的像素值时,可以根据采样位置的周围设定区域内相同颜色亚像素的像素值来确定。比如像素(i,j)的设定颜色亚像素的像素值可以根据像素(i,j)的设定颜色亚像素的像素值以及周围像素的设定颜色亚像素的像素值加权确定。示例性地,设定区域包括的与第一亚像素颜色相同的亚像素的权重与亚像素之间距离成反比;亚像素之间的距离为与第一亚像素颜色相同的亚像素和第一亚像素在待显示图像中的采样位置之间的距离。The embodiment of the present application uses a sub-pixel level decomposition method to split the image to be displayed. After sub-pixel sampling is used, the edge will be smoother and the jaggedness will be weakened, but there may be color fringe problems. Based on this, in order to weaken the color fringing, the embodiment of the present application provides a sub pixel rendering (sub pixel rendering, SPR) method to sample the pixel value of each sub pixel. When determining the pixel value of the sub-pixel to be sampled, it may be determined according to the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the same color in a set area around the sampling position. For example, the pixel value of the set color sub-pixel of the pixel (i, j) may be weighted and determined according to the pixel value of the set color sub-pixel of the pixel (i, j) and the set color sub-pixels of surrounding pixels. Exemplarily, the weight of the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the setting area is inversely proportional to the distance between the sub-pixels; the distance between the sub-pixels is the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel and the first The distance between subpixel sampling locations in the image to be displayed.
一些实施例中,设定区域的大小与显示组件和可穿戴设备的成像平面之间的距离相关。比如显示组件和可穿戴设备的成像平面之间的距离越大,设定区域的大小越大。可以理解,显示组件和可穿设备的成像平面之间的距离与设定区域的大小成反比。一些实施例中,设定区域的大小与显示组件的像素尺寸相关。可以根据显示组件的像素尺寸配置设定区域的大小。又一些实施例中,设定区域的大小与所述显示组件的显示内容相关。比如,可以根据显示组件的显示内容自适应调整设定区域的大小。比如显示内容显示的细节较多,可以增大设定区域,相反显示内容显示细节较少,可以减小设定区域。再比如,可以根据显示组件显示的图像所属的场景来自适应调整设定区域的大小。比如人物场景相比草地场景, 任务场景对应的设定区域大于草地场景对应的设定区域大小。In some embodiments, the size of the set area is related to the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device. For example, the greater the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device, the greater the size of the set area. It can be understood that the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device is inversely proportional to the size of the set area. In some embodiments, the size of the setting area is related to the pixel size of the display component. The size of the setting area can be configured according to the pixel size of the display component. In some other embodiments, the size of the setting area is related to the display content of the display component. For example, the size of the setting area can be adaptively adjusted according to the display content of the display component. For example, if the display content shows more details, the setting area can be enlarged; on the contrary, the display content shows less details, and the setting area can be reduced. For another example, the size of the setting area may be adaptively adjusted according to the scene to which the image displayed by the display component belongs. For example, compared with the grassland scene, the setting area corresponding to the task scene is larger than the setting area corresponding to the grassland scene.
一些实施例中,采样的像素点的亚像素的像素值可以采用如下公式来确定,以第一亚像素为例:In some embodiments, the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the sampled pixel point can be determined by the following formula, taking the first sub-pixel as an example:
q(i,j)=α 1*Q(i-1,j)+α 2*Q(i,j-1)+α 3*Q(i+1,j)+α 4*Q(i,j+1)+α 5*Q(i,j); q(i,j)=α 1 *Q(i-1,j)+α 2 *Q(i,j-1)+α 3 *Q(i+1,j)+α 4 *Q(i, j+1)+α 5 *Q(i,j);
其中,q(i,j)表示第一亚像素的像素值;i表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像的像素点的横坐标;j表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像的像素点的纵坐标;Q(i,j)表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像中采样位置的亚像素的像素值;α 1,α 2,α 3,α 4和α 5分别表示权重。 Wherein, q(i, j) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel; i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel of the image to be displayed; j represents the pixel of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed The ordinate of the point; Q(i,j) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed; α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 and α 5 represent the weights respectively.
另一些实施例中,采样的像素点的亚像素的像素值可以采用如下公式来确定,以第一亚像素为例:In some other embodiments, the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the sampled pixel point can be determined by the following formula, taking the first sub-pixel as an example:
q(i,j+1)=α 1*Q(i-1,j)+α 2*Q(i,j-1)+α 3*Q(i+1,j)+α 4*Q(i,j+1) q(i,j+1)=α 1 *Q(i-1,j)+α 2 *Q(i,j-1)+α 3 *Q(i+1,j)+α 4 *Q( i,j+1)
1*Q(i-1,j+1)+β 2*Q(i,j)+β 3*Q(i+1,j+1)+β 4*Q(i,j+2)。 1 *Q(i-1,j+1)+β 2 *Q(i,j)+β 3 *Q(i+1,j+1)+β 4 *Q(i,j+2) .
其中,q(i,j+1)表示第一亚像素的像素值,i表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像的像素点的横坐标,j+1表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像的像素点的纵坐标,Q(i,j+1)表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像中采样位置的亚像素的像素值,α 1,α 2,α 3,α 4,β 1,β 2,β 3和β 4分别表示权重。 Wherein, q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel, i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed, and j+1 represents the first sub-pixel in the to-be-displayed image. The ordinate of the pixel point of the displayed image, Q(i,j+1) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed, α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 , β 1 , β 2 , β 3 and β 4 denote weights, respectively.
作为一种举例,以RGB stripe亚像素排列为例,SPR过程当中,位置(i,j)像素中的绿色亚像素的像素值g(i,j),可以由位置(i-2,j)、(i-1,j-1)、(i,j-2)、(i+1,j-1)、(i+2,j)、(i+1,j+1)、(i-1,j+1)、(i,j+2)的绿色亚像素组成的菱形内像素中绿色G分量来共同确定。示例性地,像素位于菱形范围的面积不大于50%的绿色亚像素不参与确定。基于此,位置(i,j)的绿色亚像素由位置(i,j)、(i-1,j)、(i,j-1)、(i+1,j)、(i,j+1)五个像素中的绿色亚像素的像素值加权确定得到。As an example, take the RGB stripe sub-pixel arrangement as an example. During the SPR process, the pixel value g(i,j) of the green sub-pixel in the pixel at position (i,j) can be determined by the position (i-2,j) , (i-1, j-1), (i, j-2), (i+1, j-1), (i+2, j), (i+1, j+1), (i- 1, j+1), (i, j+2) green sub-pixels composed of green G components in the diamond-shaped pixels to jointly determine. Exemplarily, the green sub-pixels whose area of the pixel is not greater than 50% within the rhombic range do not participate in the determination. Based on this, the green sub-pixel at position (i,j) is composed of positions (i,j), (i-1,j), (i,j-1), (i+1,j), (i,j+ 1) The weighted determination of the pixel values of the green sub-pixels among the five pixels is obtained.
示例性地,g(i,j)=α 1*G(i-1,j)+α 2*G(i,j-1)+α 3*G(i+1,j)+α 4*G(i,j+1)+α 5*G(i,j)。例如,(i,j)、(i-1,j)、(i,j-1)、(i+1,j)、(i,j+1)分别对应的权重α 1、α 2、α 3、α 4、α 5可以根据各个像素与位置(i,j)的像素的距离来确定。比如,α 1=α 2=α 3=α 4=0.125,α 5=0.5。 Exemplarily, g(i,j)=α 1 *G(i-1,j)+α 2 *G(i,j-1)+α 3 *G(i+1,j)+α 4 * G(i,j+1)+α 5 *G(i,j). For example, weights α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 , and α 5 can be determined according to the distance between each pixel and the pixel at position (i,j). For example, α 1234 =0.125, α 5 =0.5.
例如,参见图18所示的低分辨率子帧1的像素(i,j)的绿色亚像素的采样时的像素值可以由待显示图像中黑色圆点位置像素中的绿色亚像素的像素值以及自身的像素值来加权确定。For example, referring to the sampling pixel value of the green sub-pixel of the pixel (i, j) of the low-resolution sub-frame 1 shown in FIG. And its own pixel value to determine the weight.
作为另一种示例,位置(i,j+1)像素中的红色亚像素的像素值r(i,j+1),可以由位置(i-2,j+1)、(i-1,j)、(i,j-1)、(i+1,j)、(i+2,j+1)、(i+1,j+2)、(i,j+3)、(i-1,j+1)的红色亚像素组成的菱形内像素中红色R分量来共同确定。示例性地,像素位于菱形范围的面积不大于50%的红色亚像素不参与确定。As another example, the pixel value r(i, j+1) of the red sub-pixel in the pixel at position (i, j+1) can be determined by the position (i-2, j+1), (i-1, j), (i,j-1), (i+1,j), (i+2,j+1), (i+1,j+2), (i,j+3), (i- 1, j+1) red sub-pixels composed of red R components in the diamond-shaped pixels to jointly determine. Exemplarily, the red sub-pixels whose area of the pixel is not more than 50% within the rhombic range do not participate in the determination.
基于此,位置(i,j+1)的红色亚像素由位置(i-1,j)、(i,j-1)、(i+1,j)、(i,j+1)、(i-1,j+1)、(i,j)、(i+1,j+1)、(i,j+2)中八个像素中的红色亚像素的像素值加权确定得到。Based on this, the red sub-pixel at position (i, j+1) is composed of positions (i-1, j), (i, j-1), (i+1, j), (i, j+1), ( The weighted determination of the pixel values of the red sub-pixels in the eight pixels in i-1, j+1), (i, j), (i+1, j+1), and (i, j+2) is obtained.
示例性地,可以将八个像素分为两类,位置(i,j+1)的周围上、下、左和右四个像素中的红色亚像素作为第二类,其余的像素中的红色亚像素作为第一类。两类亚像素权重分配比例为0.5:0.5。Exemplarily, eight pixels can be divided into two categories, the red sub-pixels in the upper, lower, left and right four pixels around the position (i, j+1) are used as the second category, and the red sub-pixels in the remaining pixels are Sub-pixel as the first category. The weight distribution ratio of the two types of sub-pixels is 0.5:0.5.
则位置(i,j+1)的红色亚像素的像素值r(i,j+1)可以通过如下方式确定:Then the pixel value r(i,j+1) of the red sub-pixel at position (i,j+1) can be determined as follows:
r(i,j+1)=α 1*R(i-1,j)+α 2*R(i,j-1)+α 3*R(i+1,j)+α 4*R(i,j+1) r(i,j+1)=α 1 *R(i-1,j)+α 2 *R(i,j-1)+α 3 *R(i+1,j)+α 4 *R( i,j+1)
1*R(i-1,j+1)+β 2*R(i,j)+β 3*R(i+1,j+1)+β 4*R(i,j+2)。 1 *R(i-1,j+1)+β 2 *R(i,j)+β 3 *R(i+1,j+1)+β 4 *R(i,j+2) .
8个亚像素分别对应的权重可以通过8个亚像素所在的像素的几何中心分别与位置 (i,j+1)中红色亚像素的距离来确定。以亚像素长宽比为1:3为例。The weights corresponding to the 8 sub-pixels can be determined by the distances between the geometric center of the pixel where the 8 sub-pixels are located and the red sub-pixel in position (i, j+1). Take a sub-pixel aspect ratio of 1:3 as an example.
示例性地,8个亚像素分别对应的权重分别通过如下公式来确定:Exemplarily, the weights corresponding to the eight sub-pixels are respectively determined by the following formulas:
第一类:the first sort:
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000004
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000005
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000006
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000006
第二类:The second category:
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000007
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000009
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000009
其中,x表示的是分配的用于计算红色亚像素的像素值的比例与距离的关系;x<0。Among them, x represents the relationship between the ratio of the pixel value allocated for calculating the red sub-pixel and the distance; x<0.
例如,参见图19所示的低分辨率子帧1的像素(i,j+1)的红色亚像素的采样时的像素值可以由待显示图像中黑色圆点位置像素中的红色亚像素的像素值以及自身的像素值来加权确定。并且参与(i,j+1)的红色亚像素的像素值的确定的8个亚像素分别对应的权重,可以参见图19中,黑色实心圆点表示(i,j+1)的红色亚像素,黑色虚线空心圆点表示(i,j+1)的红色亚像素的像素值的8个像素的中心位置。进而可以根据黑色虚线空心圆点与黑色实心圆点之间的距离来确定权重。For example, referring to the sampling pixel value of the red sub-pixel of the pixel (i, j+1) of the low-resolution sub-frame 1 shown in FIG. The pixel value and its own pixel value are determined by weighting. And the weights corresponding to the 8 sub-pixels involved in the determination of the pixel value of the red sub-pixel of (i, j+1), as can be seen in Figure 19, the black solid dot represents the red sub-pixel of (i, j+1) , the black dashed hollow dots represent the center positions of the 8 pixels of the pixel values of the red sub-pixels of (i,j+1). Furthermore, the weight can be determined according to the distance between the black dotted hollow dots and the black solid dots.
基于确定上述红色亚像素的像素值的方式,可以得到SPR过程中,(i,j+1)位置的蓝色亚像素的像素值b(i,j)的确定方式。Based on the above method of determining the pixel value of the red sub-pixel, the method of determining the pixel value b(i, j) of the blue sub-pixel at position (i, j+1) in the SPR process can be obtained.
一些实施例中,本申请支持显示模组工作在两种工作模式下。超分模式以及正常模式。控制组件在确定超分模式使能时,执行超分处理,在确定正常模式使能时,保持分辨率不变,帧率也不降低。在此正常模式下,TNLC统一保持目标偏振光的偏振方式不变(或统一90度改变偏振方向)。一些实施例中,控制组件可以对图像源重采样为显示组件的分辨率,直接输出到显示组件,此正常模式可以适用于一些高帧率的场景,比如游戏等。In some embodiments, the present application supports the display module to work in two working modes. Super resolution mode and normal mode. When the control component determines that the super-resolution mode is enabled, it performs super-resolution processing, and when it determines that the normal mode is enabled, the resolution remains unchanged and the frame rate does not decrease. In this normal mode, TNLC uniformly keeps the polarization mode of the target polarized light unchanged (or uniformly changes the polarization direction by 90 degrees). In some embodiments, the control component can resample the image source to the resolution of the display component, and directly output to the display component. This normal mode can be applied to some high frame rate scenarios, such as games.
本申请实施例中,为了提高图像的分辨率,提升成像效果,还提供另一种显示模组,通过偏振转换器以及双折射器件来实现超分。In the embodiment of the present application, in order to improve the resolution of the image and improve the imaging effect, another display module is provided, which realizes super-resolution through a polarization converter and a birefringent device.
参见图20所示,显示模组包括显示组件2301、偏转旋转器2302、双折射器件2303和控制组件2304。显示组件2301、偏振旋转器2302和双折射器件2303在光路传输方向上依次放置。参见图21所示,显示模组还包括折叠光路2305。显示组件2301用于显示图像。偏振旋转器2302可以根据其被施加的电压信号的幅度来调制入射线偏振光的偏振方向,使其实现任意角度的偏振旋转,而且可以通过偏振旋转器2302上的阵列晶体管实现像素或者亚像素级的单独控制。显示组件2301接收到待处理图像后,显示待显示图像。其中,待处理图像的分辨率与显示组件的分辨率相同。偏振旋转器2302在控制组件2304的控制下调整待处理图像的每个像素(或者像素中的每个亚像素)的光束的偏振方向,并输出到双折射器件2303。双折射器件2303对待处理图像包括的每个像素的光束进行分解,在第一位置输出用于投影第一子图像的第一目标偏振光以及在第二位置输出用于投影第二子图像的第二目标偏振光。不同的像素位置上输入的偏振光的偏振方向可能不同,偏振方向不同的两个像素的分解比例也是不同的。双折射器件2303的工作原理可以参见图6 的描述。双折射器件根据入射光的偏振方向的不同,输出的光可以分为o光和e光。o光可以称为寻常光,偏振方向垂直于入射面。e光也可以称为非寻常光,偏振方向位于入射面内。一些实施例中,双折射器件在输入某一偏振方向的光束时,仅输出o光,在另一偏振方向的光束时,仅输出e光。在其余的偏振方向下,既输出o光也输出e光。本申请实施例利用该原理针对不同的像素或者亚像素位置在双折射器件中输入不同的偏振方向的目标偏振光,使得双折射器件2303输出的两个位置的像素叠加后与待显示图像的对应位置处的像素的像素值大致相同或者无限接近。以第一像素和第二像素为例,第一像素与第二像素为待处理图像中偏振方向不同的两个像素。其中,第一像素的分解比例与第二像素的分解比例不同,第一像素的分解比例为第一像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例,第二像素的分解比例为第二像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例。Referring to FIG. 20 , the display module includes a display component 2301 , a deflection rotator 2302 , a birefringent device 2303 and a control component 2304 . The display component 2301, the polarization rotator 2302 and the birefringent device 2303 are placed in sequence along the transmission direction of the optical path. Referring to FIG. 21 , the display module further includes a folding optical path 2305 . The display component 2301 is used to display images. The polarization rotator 2302 can modulate the polarization direction of the incident ray polarized light according to the magnitude of the voltage signal applied to it, so that it can achieve polarization rotation at any angle, and can achieve pixel or sub-pixel level through the array transistor on the polarization rotator 2302 separate control. After receiving the image to be processed, the display component 2301 displays the image to be displayed. Wherein, the resolution of the image to be processed is the same as that of the display component. The polarization rotator 2302 adjusts the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel (or each sub-pixel in the pixel) of the image to be processed under the control of the control component 2304 , and outputs it to the birefringent device 2303 . The birefringent device 2303 decomposes the light beam of each pixel included in the image to be processed, outputs the first target polarized light for projecting the first sub-image at the first position and outputs the first polarized light for projecting the second sub-image at the second position. Two target polarized light. The polarization directions of the input polarized light at different pixel positions may be different, and the decomposition ratios of two pixels with different polarization directions are also different. For the working principle of the birefringent device 2303, refer to the description of FIG. 6 . According to the different polarization directions of the incident light, the output light of the birefringent device can be divided into o light and e light. o Light can be called ordinary light, the polarization direction is perpendicular to the plane of incidence. e-ray can also be called extraordinary light, and the polarization direction is located in the plane of incidence. In some embodiments, the birefringent device only outputs o-light when a beam of a certain polarization direction is input, and only outputs e-light when a beam of another polarization direction is input. In the remaining polarization directions, both o-light and e-light are output. The embodiment of the present application uses this principle to input target polarized light with different polarization directions into the birefringent device for different pixel or sub-pixel positions, so that the pixels at two positions output by the birefringent device 2303 are superimposed and correspond to the image to be displayed The pixel values of the pixels at the locations are approximately the same or infinitely close. Taking the first pixel and the second pixel as an example, the first pixel and the second pixel are two pixels with different polarization directions in the image to be processed. Wherein, the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is different from that of the second pixel. The decomposition ratio of the first pixel is that the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image after the beam of the first pixel is decomposed is the same as that of the pixel projected on the second sub-image. The ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel of the second pixel, the decomposition ratio of the second pixel is the ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image after the light beam of the second pixel is decomposed.
偏振旋转器2302可以是扭曲向列相液晶(twisted nematic polarization rotator,TNPR)、面内旋转液晶(in-Plane switching polarization rotator,IPSPR)、胆甾相液晶(cholesteric liquid crystals,CLC)和1/4波片组合、带薄膜晶体管(thin film transistor,TFT)电路的TNLC等中任一项。The polarization rotator 2302 may be a twisted nematic polarization rotator (TNPR), an in-Plane switching polarization rotator (IPSPR), a cholesteric liquid crystal (cholesteric liquid crystals, CLC) and 1/4 Any of wave plate combination, TNLC with thin film transistor (thin film transistor, TFT) circuit, etc.
以带TFT的TNLC为例,带TFT的TNLC由两片导电衬底中间夹一个液晶层组成。在带TFT的TNLC施加电压位于0到Vc之间,那么入射偏振光束经过TNLC后偏振方向将旋转0~90度,具体旋转角度与所施加的电压以及TNLC的具体材料有关。Taking the TNLC with TFT as an example, the TNLC with TFT is composed of a liquid crystal layer sandwiched between two conductive substrates. When the voltage applied to the TNLC with TFT is between 0 and Vc, the polarization direction of the incident polarized beam will be rotated by 0 to 90 degrees after passing through the TNLC. The specific rotation angle is related to the applied voltage and the specific material of the TNLC.
显示组件2301可以是普通的液晶显示屏(LCD),也可以是OLED,或者更先进的micro-LED显示屏,其中OLED显示器具有更高的发光效率以及更高的对比度;mini-LED显示器具有更高的发光亮度,可以应用于需要更强的发光亮度的场景。The display component 2301 can be an ordinary liquid crystal display (LCD), OLED, or a more advanced micro-LED display, wherein the OLED display has higher luminous efficiency and higher contrast ratio; the mini-LED display has more High luminous brightness, can be applied to scenes that require stronger luminous brightness.
在一种可能的实现方式中,控制组件2304,例如可以是处理器、微处理器、控制器等控制组件,例如可以是通用中央处理器(central processing unit,CPU),通用处理器,数字信号处理(digital signal processing,DSP),专用集成电路(application specific integrated circuits,ASIC),现场可编程门阵列(field programmable gate array,FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、晶体管逻辑器件、硬件部件或者其任意组合。In a possible implementation, the control component 2304 can be, for example, a processor, a microprocessor, a controller and other control components, for example, it can be a general-purpose central processing unit (central processing unit, CPU), a general-purpose processor, a digital signal processing (digital signal processing, DSP), application specific integrated circuits (application specific integrated circuits, ASIC), field programmable gate array (field programmable gate array, FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, transistor logic devices, hardware components or any other combination.
双折射器件可以采用晶体,比如石英晶体、硼酸钡晶体、石英晶体、铌酸锂晶体或者二氧化钛晶体等晶体。一般来说晶体的双折射率较小,导致VR设备或者AR设备体积较大。本申请实施例可以将液晶作为双折射器件的材料,利用液晶材料较大的双折射率使得制作的双折射器件的厚度较小,能够更好的放置在空间受限的VR设备或者AR设备中。示例性地,所述液晶材料可以采用液态的液晶材料也可以采用紫外固化或者热固化的液晶聚合物材料。示例性地,双折射器件2303采用液晶聚合物RM 257,经过表面取向或者电场取向后,其液晶分子指向矢与表面的夹角为~45度,然后经过紫外固化形成液晶聚合物。The birefringent device can use crystals, such as quartz crystals, barium borate crystals, quartz crystals, lithium niobate crystals, or titanium dioxide crystals. Generally speaking, the birefringence of the crystal is small, resulting in a larger volume of the VR device or the AR device. In the embodiment of the present application, liquid crystal can be used as the material of the birefringent device, and the larger birefringence index of the liquid crystal material can be used to make the birefringent device thinner, which can be better placed in a VR device or an AR device with limited space. . Exemplarily, the liquid crystal material may be a liquid liquid crystal material or a liquid crystal polymer material cured by ultraviolet or heat. Exemplarily, the birefringent device 2303 uses liquid crystal polymer RM 257. After surface orientation or electric field orientation, the angle between the director of the liquid crystal molecules and the surface is ~45 degrees, and then the liquid crystal polymer is formed through ultraviolet curing.
后续为了便于描述,显示模组中的各个器件不再示例编号。参见图22所示,以显示组件发出的光束为竖直线偏振光为例,竖直线偏振光在经过偏振旋转器后,通过控制组件控制施加在偏振旋转器上的电压信号,偏振旋转器可以将竖直线偏振光旋转为任意角度的线偏振光。由于偏振旋转器可以实现亚像素级的控制,从而显示组件中的每个像素,甚至每个亚像素在经过偏振旋转器后的偏振方向不完全一致。光束经过偏振旋转器后到达双折射器件,并被双折射器件分为两束光,o光和e光。两束光的强度比例由入射光的偏振方 向或者说偏振角度决定,如图22所示。In order to facilitate the description later, each device in the display module will not be numbered as an example. Referring to Figure 22, taking the light beam emitted by the display component as vertical linearly polarized light as an example, after the vertical linearly polarized light passes through the polarization rotator, the voltage signal applied to the polarization rotator is controlled by the control component, and the polarization rotator Vertical linearly polarized light can be rotated into linearly polarized light at any angle. Since the polarization rotator can realize sub-pixel level control, the polarization directions of each pixel or even each sub-pixel in the display component are not completely consistent after passing through the polarization rotator. The light beam reaches the birefringent device after passing through the polarization rotator, and is divided into two beams by the birefringent device, o light and e light. The intensity ratio of the two beams is determined by the polarization direction or polarization angle of the incident light, as shown in Figure 22.
从上可以看出,实际上一束光经过双折射器件后,将分为两束光,两束光对应两个图像,分别为第一子图像和第二子图像。根据设置在显示模组中的双折射器件,第一子图像的位置与所述第二子图像的位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2和/或在水平方向上间隔Px/2,所述Py表示所述像素在竖直方向的间距,所述Px表示所述像素在水平方向的间距。通过两个子图像进入到人眼后,利用人眼的视觉暂留和视觉合成功能,在脑海中合成高分辨率的图像,因而合成的高分辨率图像的帧率有所降低,但是分辨率会提高。It can be seen from the above that in fact, a beam of light will be divided into two beams after passing through the birefringent device, and the two beams of light correspond to two images, which are the first sub-image and the second sub-image respectively. According to the birefringent device arranged in the display module, the position of the first sub-image and the position of the second sub-image are separated by Py/2 in the vertical direction and/or Px/2 in the horizontal direction, the Py represents the pitch of the pixels in the vertical direction, and the Px represents the pitch of the pixels in the horizontal direction. After the two sub-images enter the human eye, the human eye's persistence of vision and visual synthesis function are used to synthesize a high-resolution image in the mind, so the frame rate of the synthesized high-resolution image is reduced, but the resolution will be reduced. improve.
本申请实施例中,控制组件可以通过估计并调整待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,使得调整后的第一子图像和第二子图像叠加投影后的图像与所述待显示图像的相似度大于设定阈值,或者说叠加投影后的图像与待显示的图像大致相同。其中,所述设定阈值是根据人眼对图像差异的感知能力确定的。然后控制组件可以根据调整后的第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制所述偏振旋转器调整所述待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。针对偏振旋转器来说,不同的偏振方向对应输出的o光和e光的发光强度分配比例具有对应关系。因此,在第一子图像与第二子图像每个像素的发光强度后,进而根据对应关系,可以确定每个像素对应需要的输入的光束的偏振方向。针对偏振旋转器,不同的偏振方向对应不同的施压电压,从而控制组件可以根据偏振方向对应的施压电压来对每个像素或者亚像素施加对应的施加电压。In the embodiment of the present application, the control component can estimate and adjust the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image, so that the adjusted first sub-image The similarity between the image and the image to be displayed after superimposing and projecting the second sub-image is greater than a set threshold, or in other words, the image after superimposing and projecting is substantially the same as the image to be displayed. Wherein, the set threshold is determined according to human eyes' ability to perceive image differences. Then the control component can control the polarization rotator to adjust the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed according to the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image direction of polarization. For the polarization rotator, different polarization directions correspond to the distribution ratios of the output luminous intensity of the o-light and e-light. Therefore, after the luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the second sub-image, and further according to the corresponding relationship, the polarization direction of the input light beam corresponding to each pixel can be determined. For the polarization rotator, different polarization directions correspond to different applied voltages, so that the control component can apply a corresponding applied voltage to each pixel or sub-pixel according to the applied voltage corresponding to the polarization direction.
示例性地,偏转旋转器上每个像素(或者亚像素)的电压信号强度以及显示组件的内容可以如下的优化公式(1)得到:Exemplarily, the voltage signal strength of each pixel (or sub-pixel) on the deflection rotator and the content of the display component can be obtained by the following optimization formula (1):
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000010
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000010
其中S是由目标图像所有像素值组成的列向量;R为由o光组成的低分辨率的第一子图像V1和e光组成的低分辨率的第二子图像V2合成的高分辨率图像,可以理解为实际显示的图像。R中各个像素或者亚像素排列得到的列向量与S中的各个像素或者亚像素排列得到的列向量的排列方式类似。Where S is a column vector composed of all pixel values of the target image; R is a high-resolution image synthesized by the low-resolution first sub-image V1 composed of o-light and the low-resolution second sub-image V2 composed of e-light , which can be understood as the actual displayed image. The column vectors obtained by the arrangement of each pixel or sub-pixel in R are similar to the arrangement of the column vectors obtained by the arrangement of each pixel or sub-pixel in S.
M为将第一子图像V1和第二子图像V2映射到R的映射矩阵。M is a mapping matrix that maps the first sub-image V1 and the second sub-image V2 to R.
示例性地,以对角超分为例,参见图23所示,经过双折射器件后待处理的图像被分解为第一子图像(o光子帧V1)和第二子图像(e光子帧V2)。而第一子图像和第二子图像合成的图像参见图23中所示,以高分辨率图像中的像素9为例,该像素9是由o光子帧V1的像素2和e光子帧V2中的像素6合成的,因而参见映射矩阵M,映射矩阵M中的第九行,除了第2个元素和第P+6个元素为1外,其他元素都为0(其中P为子帧的像素总数)。Exemplarily, taking diagonal super-division as an example, as shown in FIG. 23, the image to be processed after passing through the birefringent device is decomposed into a first sub-image (o-photon frame V1) and a second sub-image (e-photon-frame V2 ). The image synthesized by the first sub-image and the second sub-image is shown in FIG. The pixel 6 is synthesized, so refer to the mapping matrix M, the ninth row in the mapping matrix M, except the 2nd element and the P+6th element are 1, other elements are 0 (wherein P is the pixel of the subframe total).
示例性地,映射矩阵M如下:Exemplarily, the mapping matrix M is as follows:
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000011
Figure PCTCN2022121488-appb-000011
基于上述内容和相同的技术构思,本申请实施例还提供一种成像控制方法,该成像控制方法应用于可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备包括显示组件和像素位置调整组件,像素位置调整组件包括偏振转换器和双折射器件。Based on the above content and the same technical idea, an embodiment of the present application further provides an imaging control method, which is applied to a wearable device. The wearable device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component, and the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization converter and a birefringence device.
参见图24所示,为一种可能的成像控制方法流程示意图。该方法应用于显示设备,显示设备包括显示组件和像素位置调整组件,显示组件包括多个像素,多个像素中每个像素包括多个亚像素。Referring to FIG. 24 , it is a schematic flowchart of a possible imaging control method. The method is applied to a display device. The display device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component. The display component includes a plurality of pixels, and each pixel of the plurality of pixels includes a plurality of sub-pixels.
S2301,接收待显示图像,将待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到多帧图像;多帧图像中每帧图像的分辨率与显示组件的分辨率相同,多帧图像的分辨率小于待显示图像的分辨率。S2301. Receive the image to be displayed, and decompose the image to be displayed at the sub-pixel level to obtain multiple frames of images; the resolution of each frame of images in the multiple frames of images is the same as the resolution of the display component, and the resolution of the multiple frames of images is smaller than that of the image to be displayed resolution.
S2302,控制所述像素位置调整组件分时调整所述显示组件显示的每帧图像的位置。S2302. Control the pixel position adjustment component to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time division.
其中,所述显示组件显示第一图像的时间与所述像素位置调整组件调整所述第一图像的时间同步,所述第一图像为所述多帧图像中任一图像。Wherein, the time when the display component displays the first image is synchronized with the time when the pixel position adjustment component adjusts the first image, and the first image is any one of the multiple frames of images.
一些实施例中,显示设备支持两种模式,超分模式或者正常模式。In some embodiments, the display device supports two modes, super resolution mode or normal mode.
当显示设备的超分模式使能时,将待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到多帧图像。When the super-resolution mode of the display device is enabled, the image to be displayed is decomposed at the sub-pixel level to obtain a multi-frame image.
在显示设备的超分模式未使能时,即正常模式使能时,对待显示图像进行降采样处理到待处理图像;将所述待处理图像输入给所述显示组件,使得所述显示组件显示待处理图像;通过像素位置调整组件在设定位置输出所述待处理图像。可以理解偏振转换器不再调整开关状态,即不再需要被控制输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向。When the super-resolution mode of the display device is not enabled, that is, when the normal mode is enabled, the image to be displayed is down-sampled to an image to be processed; the image to be processed is input to the display component, so that the display component displays An image to be processed; the pixel position adjustment component is used to output the image to be processed at a set position. It can be understood that the polarization converter no longer adjusts the switch state, that is, the polarization direction of the output target polarized light that needs to be controlled no longer needs to be adjusted.
一些实施例中,多帧图像中的第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从待显示图像包括的相邻的至少h个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的。In some embodiments, the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image of the multi-frame images are obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in at least h adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed.
其中,h为多帧图像的图像数量,第一图像为多帧图像中的任一图像,第一像素点是第一图像中的任一像素点。Wherein, h is the number of images in the multi-frame images, the first image is any image in the multi-frame images, and the first pixel is any pixel in the first image.
一些实施例中,第一像素点中包括的第一亚像素的像素值是根据待显示图像的设定区域包括的与第一亚像素的颜色相同的亚像素的像素值确定的;In some embodiments, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is determined according to the pixel value of the sub-pixel that is the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the set area of the image to be displayed;
设定区域的几何中心为第一亚像素在待显示图像中的采样位置。The geometric center of the set area is the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed.
一些实施例中,第一像素点中包括的第一亚像素的像素值是对设定区域包括的与第一亚像素的颜色相同的亚像素的像素值进行加权求和得到;In some embodiments, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel point is obtained by weighting and summing the pixel values of the sub-pixels included in the set area with the same color as the first sub-pixel;
其中,设定区域包括的与第一亚像素颜色相同的亚像素的权重与亚像素之间距离成反比;亚像素之间的距离为与第一亚像素颜色相同的亚像素和第一亚像素在待显示图像中的采样位置之间的距离。Wherein, the weight of the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the setting area is inversely proportional to the distance between the sub-pixels; the distance between the sub-pixels is the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel and the first sub-pixel The distance between sample locations in the image to be displayed.
一些实施例中,显示设备为可穿戴设备,设定区域的大小与显示组件和可穿戴设备的成像平面之间的距离相关。In some embodiments, the display device is a wearable device, and the size of the set area is related to the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device.
一些实施例中,设定区域的大小与显示组件的像素尺寸相关。In some embodiments, the size of the setting area is related to the pixel size of the display component.
一些实施例中,设定区域的大小与显示组件的显示内容相关。In some embodiments, the size of the setting area is related to the display content of the display component.
一些实施例中,第一亚像素的像素值满足如下公式所示的条件:In some embodiments, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
q(i,j)=α 1*Q(i-1,j)+α 2*Q(i,j-1)+α 3*Q(i+1,j)+α 4*Q(i,j+1)+α 5*Q(i,j); q(i,j)=α 1 *Q(i-1,j)+α 2 *Q(i,j-1)+α 3 *Q(i+1,j)+α 4 *Q(i, j+1)+α 5 *Q(i,j);
其中,q(i,j)表示第一亚像素的像素值;i表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的横坐标;j表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的纵坐标;Q(i,j)表示第一亚像素在待显示图像中采样位置的亚像素的像素值;α 1,α 2,α 3,α 4和α 5分别表示权重。 Among them, q(i, j) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel; i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed; j represents the ordinate of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed ; Q(i,j) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed; α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 and α 5 represent the weights respectively.
一些实施例中,第一亚像素的像素值满足如下公式所示的条件:In some embodiments, the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
q(i,j+1)=α 1*Q(i-1,j)+α 2*Q(i,j-1)+α 3*Q(i+1,j)+α 4*Q(i,j+1) q(i,j+1)=α 1 *Q(i-1,j)+α 2 *Q(i,j-1)+α 3 *Q(i+1,j)+α 4 *Q( i,j+1)
1*Q(i-1,j+1)+β 2*Q(i,j)+β 3*Q(i+1,j+1)+β 4*Q(i,j+2)。 1 *Q(i-1,j+1)+β 2 *Q(i,j)+β 3 *Q(i+1,j+1)+β 4 *Q(i,j+2) .
其中,q(i,j+1)表示第一亚像素的像素值,i表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的横坐标,j+1表示第一亚像素在待显示图像的像素点的纵坐标,Q(i,j+1)表示第一亚像素在待显示图像中采样位置的亚像素的像素值,α 1,α 2,α 3,α 4,β 1,β 2,β 3和β 4分别表示权重。 Among them, q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel, i represents the abscissa of the pixel point of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed, and j+1 represents the pixel of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed The ordinate of the point, Q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel of the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed, α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 , β 1 , β 2 , β 3 and β 4 represent the weights, respectively.
一些实施例中,像素位置调整组件包括偏振转换器和偏振位移器件;In some embodiments, the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization converter and a polarization shifting device;
控制像素位置调整组件分时调整显示组件显示的每帧图像的位置,包括:分时将多帧图像输入给显示组件,使得显示组件分时发射目标偏振光,其中,目标偏振光用于承载多帧图像中的每帧图像;控制偏振转换器分时调整输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向,使得偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向时,偏振位移器件在第一位置输出目标偏振光,在偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向时,偏振位移器件在第二位置输出目标偏振光。Controlling the pixel position adjustment component to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time division includes: inputting multiple frames of images to the display component in time division, so that the display component emits target polarized light in time division, wherein the target polarized light is used to carry multiple Each frame of image in the frame image; control the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light in time division, so that when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the first polarization direction, the polarization displacement device is in the first position Outputting the target polarized light, when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the second polarization direction, the polarization displacement device outputs the target polarized light at the second position.
一些实施例中,多帧图像包括第一图像和第二图像;In some embodiments, the multiple frames of images include a first image and a second image;
控制偏振转换器分时调整输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向,包括:Control the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light in time division, including:
在第一时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向,在第二时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向,以使得偏振位移器件输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的第一位置与输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的第二位置在水平方向上间隔为Px/2;Px表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在水平方向的间距。In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output polarization direction of the target polarized light bearing the first image to be the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output target polarization bearing the second image. The polarization direction of the light is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the second position of the output target polarized light bearing the second image are spaced horizontally by Px/2; Px represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the horizontal direction.
一些实施例中,第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从待显示图像包括的水平相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;In some embodiments, the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in two horizontally adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed;
第二图像中的第二像素点包括的亚像素是从水平相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;The sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in two horizontally adjacent pixels;
第一像素点在第一图像中的位置坐标与第二像素点在第二图像中的位置坐标相同。The position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
一些实施例中,多帧图像包括第一图像和第二图像;In some embodiments, the multiple frames of images include a first image and a second image;
控制偏振转换器分时调整输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向,包括:Control the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light in time division, including:
在第一时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向,在第二时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向,以使得偏振位移器件输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的第一位置与输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的第二位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2;Py表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在竖直方向的间距。In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output polarization direction of the target polarized light bearing the first image to be the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the output target polarization bearing the second image. The polarization direction of the light is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the second position of the output target polarized light bearing the second image are spaced vertically by Py/2; Py represents the distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image in the vertical direction.
一些实施例中,第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从待显示图像中垂直方向上相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;In some embodiments, the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the vertical direction in the image to be displayed;
第二图像中的第二像素点包括的亚像素是从垂直方向上相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;The sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the vertical direction;
第一像素点在第一图像中的位置坐标与第二像素点在第二图像中的位置坐标相同。The position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
一些实施例中,多帧图像包括第一图像和第二图像;In some embodiments, the multiple frames of images include a first image and a second image;
控制偏振转换器分时调整输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向,包括:Control the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the output target polarized light in time division, including:
第一时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输入的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向,在第二时间单元内控制偏振转换器调整输入的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向,以使得偏振位移器件输出的承载第一图像的目标偏振光的第一位置与输出的承载第二图像的目标偏振光的第二位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2且在水平方向上偏移Px/2,Py表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在竖直方向的间距,Px表示第一图像或者第二图像的相邻像素在竖直方向的间距。In the first time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the input target polarized light bearing the first image to the first polarization direction, and in the second time unit, the polarization converter is controlled to adjust the input target polarized light bearing the second image. The polarization direction of is the second polarization direction, so that the first position of the target polarized light bearing the first image output by the polarization displacement device and the output second position of the target polarized light bearing the second image are separated by Py in the vertical direction /2 and offset Px/2 in the horizontal direction, Py represents the vertical distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image, and Px represents the vertical distance between adjacent pixels of the first image or the second image Pitch.
一些实施例中,第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从待显示图像中对角方向上相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;In some embodiments, the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are obtained by sampling from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in a diagonal direction in the image to be displayed;
第二图像中的第二像素点包括的亚像素是从对角方向上相邻两个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;The sub-pixels included in the second pixel in the second image are sampled from the sub-pixels included in two adjacent pixels in the diagonal direction;
第一像素点在第一图像中的位置坐标与第二像素点在第二图像中的位置坐标相同。The position coordinates of the first pixel in the first image are the same as the position coordinates of the second pixel in the second image.
本申请实施例还提供另一种成像控制方法,该成像控制方法应用于可穿戴设备。可穿戴设备包括显示组件和像素位置调整组件,像素位置调整组件包括偏振旋转器和双折射器件。The embodiment of the present application also provides another imaging control method, which is applied to a wearable device. The wearable device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component, and the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization rotator and a birefringent device.
参见图25所示,为一种可能的成像控制方法流程示意图。Referring to FIG. 25 , it is a schematic flowchart of a possible imaging control method.
S2401,接收待显示图像,对待显示图像进行降采样处理得到待处理图像,并将待处理图像输入给显示组件,使得显示组件发射承载待显示图像的目标偏振光,其中,目标帧图像为多帧图像中的一帧图像,待处理图像的分辨率与显示组件的分辨率相同;S2401. Receive the image to be displayed, perform down-sampling processing on the image to be displayed to obtain the image to be processed, and input the image to be processed to the display component, so that the display component emits target polarized light carrying the image to be displayed, wherein the target frame image is multiple frames A frame of image in the image, the resolution of the image to be processed is the same as that of the display component;
S2402,控制偏振旋转器调整输出的待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,使得双折射器件对待处理图像包括的每个像素的光束进行分解,在第一位置输出用于投影第一子图像的第一目标偏振光以及在第二位置输出用于投影第二子图像的第二目标偏振光;S2402. Control the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed, so that the birefringent device decomposes the light beam of each pixel included in the image to be processed, and outputs the first sub-pixel used for projection at the first position outputting a first target polarized light of the image and outputting a second target polarized light for projecting a second sub-image at a second location;
其中,第一像素的分解比例与第二像素的分解比例不同,第一像素与第二像素为待处理图像中偏振方向不同的两个像素,第一像素的分解比例为第一像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例,第二像素的分解比例为第二像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例。Wherein, the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is different from that of the second pixel, the first pixel and the second pixel are two pixels with different polarization directions in the image to be processed, and the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is that the light beam of the first pixel passes through The ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image after decomposition to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image, the decomposition ratio of the second pixel is the pixel projected on the first sub-image after the light beam of the second pixel is decomposed The luminous intensity is proportional to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image.
一些实施例中,第一子图像的位置与第二子图像的位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2和/或在水平方向上间隔Px/2,Py表示像素在竖直方向的间距,Px表示像素在竖直方向的间距。In some embodiments, the position of the first sub-image and the position of the second sub-image are separated by Py/2 in the vertical direction and/or Px/2 in the horizontal direction, where Py represents the distance between pixels in the vertical direction, and Px Indicates the pixel spacing in the vertical direction.
一些实施例中,控制偏振旋转器调整输出的待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,包括:In some embodiments, controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes:
控制偏振旋转器调整待处理图像的每个像素包括的亚像素的光束的偏振方向。The polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the light beams of the sub-pixels included in each pixel of the image to be processed.
一些实施例中,控制偏振旋转器调整输出的待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向, 包括:In some embodiments, controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes:
根据待显示图像的每个像素的发光强度估计待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度;其中,第一子图像和第二子图像的分辨率相同,且小于待显示图像的分辨率;Estimating the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image according to the luminous intensity of each pixel of the image to be displayed; wherein, the first sub-image and the second sub-image The resolutions of the two sub-images are the same and smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed;
根据待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制偏振旋转器调整待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。According to the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image, the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed.
一些实施例中,控制偏振旋转器调整输出的待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,包括:In some embodiments, controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed includes:
估计并调整待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,使得调整后的第一子图像和第二子图像叠加投影后的图像与所述待显示图像的相似度大于设定阈值;所述设定阈值是根据人眼对图像差异的感知能力确定的;Estimating and adjusting the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image, so that the adjusted first sub-image and the second sub-image superpose the projected The similarity between the image and the image to be displayed is greater than a set threshold; the set threshold is determined according to the human eye's ability to perceive image differences;
根据调整后的第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制所述偏振旋转器调整所述待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。According to the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image, the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed.
本申请的实施例中的方法步骤可以通过硬件的方式来实现,也可以由处理器执行软件指令的方式来实现。软件指令可以由相应的软件模块组成,软件模块可以被存放于随机存取存储器(random access memory,RAM)、闪存、只读存储器(read-only memory,ROM)、可编程只读存储器(programmable ROM,PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(erasable PROM,EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(electrically EPROM,EEPROM)、寄存器、硬盘、移动硬盘、CD-ROM或者本领域熟知的任何其它形式的存储介质中。一种示例性的存储介质耦合至处理器,从而使处理器能够从该存储介质读取信息,且可向该存储介质写入信息。当然,存储介质也可以是处理器的组成部分。处理器和存储介质可以位于ASIC中。另外,该ASIC可以位于头戴式显示设备或终端设备中。当然,处理器和存储介质也可以作为分立组件存在于头戴式显示设备或终端设备中。The method steps in the embodiments of the present application may be implemented by means of hardware, or may be implemented by means of a processor executing software instructions. Software instructions can be composed of corresponding software modules, and software modules can be stored in random access memory (random access memory, RAM), flash memory, read-only memory (read-only memory, ROM), programmable read-only memory (programmable ROM) , PROM), erasable programmable read-only memory (erasable PROM, EPROM), electrically erasable programmable read-only memory (electrically EPROM, EEPROM), register, hard disk, mobile hard disk, CD-ROM or known in the art any other form of storage medium. An exemplary storage medium is coupled to the processor such the processor can read information from, and write information to, the storage medium. Of course, the storage medium may also be a component of the processor. The processor and storage medium can be located in the ASIC. In addition, the ASIC may be located in a head-mounted display device or a terminal device. Certainly, the processor and the storage medium may also exist in the head-mounted display device or the terminal device as discrete components.
在上述实施例中,可以全部或部分地通过软件、硬件、固件或者其任意组合来实现。当使用软件实现时,可以全部或部分地以计算机程序产品的形式实现。所述计算机程序产品包括一个或多个计算机程序或指令。在计算机上加载和执行所述计算机程序或指令时,全部或部分地执行本申请实施例所述的流程或功能。所述计算机可以是通用计算机、专用计算机、计算机网络、网络设备、用户设备或者其它可编程装置。所述计算机程序或指令可以存储在计算机可读存储介质中,或者从一个计算机可读存储介质向另一个计算机可读存储介质传输,例如,所述计算机程序或指令可以从一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心通过有线或无线方式向另一个网站站点、计算机、服务器或数据中心进行传输。所述计算机可读存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质或者是集成一个或多个可用介质的服务器、数据中心等数据存储设备。所述可用介质可以是磁性介质,例如,软盘、硬盘、磁带;也可以是光介质,例如,数字视频光盘(digital video disc,DVD);还可以是半导体介质,例如,固态硬盘(solid state drive,SSD)。In the above embodiments, all or part of them may be implemented by software, hardware, firmware or any combination thereof. When implemented using software, it may be implemented in whole or in part in the form of a computer program product. The computer program product comprises one or more computer programs or instructions. When the computer program or instructions are loaded and executed on the computer, the processes or functions described in the embodiments of the present application are executed in whole or in part. The computer may be a general purpose computer, a special purpose computer, a computer network, network equipment, user equipment, or other programmable devices. The computer program or instructions can be stored in or transmitted from one computer-readable storage medium to another computer-readable storage medium, for example, the computer program or instructions can be downloaded from a website, computer, A server or data center transmits to another website site, computer, server or data center by wired or wireless means. The computer-readable storage medium may be any available medium that can be accessed by a computer, or a data storage device such as a server or a data center integrating one or more available media. Described usable medium can be magnetic medium, for example, floppy disk, hard disk, magnetic tape; It can also be optical medium, for example, digital video disc (digital video disc, DVD); It can also be semiconductor medium, for example, solid state drive (solid state drive) , SSD).
在本申请的各个实施例中,如果没有特殊说明以及逻辑冲突,不同的实施例之间的术语和/或描述具有一致性、且可以相互引用,不同的实施例中的技术特征根据其内在的逻辑关系可以组合形成新的实施例。In each embodiment of the present application, if there is no special explanation and logical conflict, the terms and/or descriptions between different embodiments are consistent and can be referred to each other, and the technical features in different embodiments are based on their inherent Logical relationships can be combined to form new embodiments.
本申请中,“至少一个”是指一个或者多个,“多个”是指两个或两个以上。“和/或”,描述关联对象的关联关系,表示可以存在三种关系,例如,A和/或B,可以表示:单独存 在A,同时存在A和B,单独存在B的情况,其中A,B可以是单数或者复数。“以下至少一项(个)”或其类似表达,是指这些项中的任意组合,包括单项(个)或复数项(个)的任意组合。例如,a,b或c中的至少一项(个),可以表示:a,b,c,“a和b”,“a和c”,“b和c”,或“a和b和c”,其中a,b,c可以是单个,也可以是多个。在本申请的文字描述中,字符“/”,一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。在本申请的公式中,字符“/”,表示前后关联对象是一种“相除”的关系。本申请中,符号“(a,b)”表示开区间,范围为大于a且小于b;“[a,b]”表示闭区间,范围为大于或等于a且小于或等于b;“(a,b]”表示半开半闭区间,范围为大于a且小于或等于b;“(a,b]”表示半开半闭区间,范围为大于a且小于或等于b。另外,在本申请中,“示例的”一词用于表示作例子、例证或说明。本申请中被描述为“示例”的任何实施例或设计方案不应被解释为比其它实施例或设计方案更优选或更具优势。或者可理解为,使用示例的一词旨在以具体方式呈现概念,并不对本申请构成限定。In this application, "at least one" means one or more, and "multiple" means two or more. "And/or" describes the association relationship of associated objects, indicating that there may be three types of relationships, for example, A and/or B, which can mean: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, and B exists alone, where A, B can be singular or plural. "At least one of the following" or similar expressions refer to any combination of these items, including any combination of single or plural items. For example, at least one item (piece) of a, b or c can mean: a, b, c, "a and b", "a and c", "b and c", or "a and b and c ", where a, b, c can be single or multiple. In the text description of this application, the character "/" generally indicates that the contextual objects are an "or" relationship. In the formulas of this application, the character "/" indicates that the front and back related objects are in a "division" relationship. In this application, the symbol "(a, b)" means an open interval, the range is greater than a and less than b; "[a, b]" means a closed interval, the range is greater than or equal to a and less than or equal to b; "(a , b]" means a half-open and half-closed interval, the range is greater than a and less than or equal to b; "(a, b]" means a half-open and half-closed interval, the range is greater than a and less than or equal to b. In addition, in this application In , the term "exemplary" is used to mean an example, illustration, or illustration. Any embodiment or design described in this application as "exemplary" should not be construed as preferred or more preferred than other embodiments or designs. Or it can be understood that the use of the word example is intended to present a concept in a specific manner, and does not constitute a limitation to the application.
可以理解的是,在本申请中涉及的各种数字编号仅为描述方便进行的区分,并不用来限制本申请的实施例的范围。上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味着执行顺序的先后,各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定。术语“第一”、“第二”等类似表述,是用于分区别类似的对象,而不必用于描述特定的顺序或先后次序。此外,术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们的任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含,例如,包含了一系列步骤或单元。方法、系统、产品或设备不必限于清楚地列出的那些步骤或单元,而是可包括没有清楚地列出的或对于这些过程、方法、产品或设备固有的其它步骤或单元。It can be understood that the various numbers involved in the present application are only for convenience of description, and are not used to limit the scope of the embodiments of the present application. The size of the serial numbers of the above-mentioned processes does not mean the order of execution, and the execution order of each process should be determined by its functions and internal logic. The terms "first", "second" and similar expressions are used to distinguish similar objects, and are not necessarily used to describe a specific order or sequence. Furthermore, the terms "comprising" and "having", as well as any variations thereof, are intended to cover a non-exclusive inclusion, for example, of a sequence of steps or elements. A method, system, product or device is not necessarily limited to those steps or elements explicitly listed, but may include other steps or elements not explicitly listed or inherent to the process, method, product or device.
尽管结合具体特征及其实施例对本申请进行了描述,显而易见的,在不脱离本申请的精神和范围的情况下,可对其进行各种修改和组合。相应地,本说明书和附图仅仅是所附权利要求所界定的方案进行示例性说明,且视为已覆盖本申请范围内的任意和所有修改、变化、组合或等同物。Although the application has been described in conjunction with specific features and embodiments thereof, it will be apparent that various modifications and combinations can be made thereto without departing from the spirit and scope of the application. Accordingly, the specification and drawings are merely illustrative of the solutions defined by the appended claims, and are deemed to cover any and all modifications, changes, combinations or equivalents within the scope of the application.
显然,本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的范围。这样,倘若本申请实施例的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内,则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。Obviously, those skilled in the art can make various changes and modifications to the application without departing from the scope of the application. In this way, if the modifications and variations of the embodiments of the present application fall within the scope of the claims of the present application and equivalent technologies, the present application also intends to include these modifications and variations.

Claims (31)

  1. 一种显示模组,其特征在于,包括显示组件、像素位置调整组件和控制组件,所述显示组件包括多个像素,所述多个像素中每个像素包括多个亚像素;A display module, characterized in that it includes a display component, a pixel position adjustment component and a control component, the display component includes a plurality of pixels, and each pixel of the plurality of pixels includes a plurality of sub-pixels;
    所述显示组件,用于在所述控制组件的控制下分时显示多帧图像;所述多帧图像是对待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到的,所述多帧图像的分辨率与所述显示组件的分辨率相同,所述多帧图像的分辨率小于所述待显示图像的分辨率;The display component is used to display multiple frames of images in time division under the control of the control component; the multiple frames of images are obtained by sub-pixel decomposition of the image to be displayed, and the resolution of the multiple frames of images is the same as that of the The display components have the same resolution, and the resolution of the multi-frame images is smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed;
    所述像素位置调整组件,用于在所述控制组件的控制下分时调整所述显示组件显示的每帧图像的位置;The pixel position adjustment component is used to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time division under the control of the control component;
    其中,所述显示组件显示第一图像的时间与所述像素位置调整组件调整所述第一图像的时间同步,所述第一图像为所述多帧图像中任一图像。Wherein, the time when the display component displays the first image is synchronized with the time when the pixel position adjustment component adjusts the first image, and the first image is any one of the multiple frames of images.
  2. 如权利要求1所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述像素位置调整组件包括偏振转换器和偏振位移器件;The display module according to claim 1, wherein the pixel position adjustment component comprises a polarization converter and a polarization displacement device;
    偏振转换器,用于在所述控制组件的控制下分时调整所述偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向,所述目标偏振光承载多帧图像中的一帧图像;a polarization converter, configured to time-divisionally adjust the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter under the control of the control component, and the target polarized light carries one frame of images among multiple frames of images;
    所述偏振位移器件,用于在所述偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向时,在第一位置输出所述目标偏振光,在偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向时,在第二位置输出所述目标偏振光。The polarization displacement device is configured to output the target polarized light at the first position when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the first polarization direction, and when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is When the polarization direction is the second polarization direction, the target polarized light is output at the second position.
  3. 如权利要求2所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述偏振位移器件为双折射器件或者偏振光栅。The display module according to claim 2, wherein the polarization shifting device is a birefringent device or a polarization grating.
  4. 如权利要求2或3所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述偏振转换器包括扭曲向列向液晶或者面内旋转液晶;或者所述偏振转换器包括胆甾相液晶和1/4波片。The display module according to claim 2 or 3, wherein the polarization converter comprises twisted nematic liquid crystal or in-plane rotating liquid crystal; or the polarization converter comprises cholesteric liquid crystal and 1/4 wave piece.
  5. 如权利要求2-4任一项所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述双折射器件为双折射液晶,所述双折射液晶采用石英晶体、硼酸钡晶体、铌酸锂晶体或者二氧化钛晶体或者液晶聚合物。The display module according to any one of claims 2-4, wherein the birefringent device is a birefringent liquid crystal, and the birefringent liquid crystal adopts quartz crystal, barium borate crystal, lithium niobate crystal or titanium dioxide crystal or liquid crystal polymers.
  6. 如权利要求1所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述像素位置调整组件为马达。The display module according to claim 1, wherein the pixel position adjustment component is a motor.
  7. 如权利要求1-6任一项所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述控制组件,具体用于接收所述待显示图像,并对所述待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到所述多帧图像,并分时将所述多帧图像发送给所述显示组件。The display module according to any one of claims 1-6, wherein the control component is specifically configured to receive the image to be displayed, and decompose the image to be displayed at sub-pixel level to obtain the multiple frames of images, and send the multiple frames of images to the display component in time division.
  8. 如权利要求1-7任一项所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述显示模组还包括折叠光路,所述折叠光路位于所述显示组件与所述像素位置调整组件之间,所述折叠光路用于将承载所述多帧图像的任一图像的目标偏振光传输至所述像素位置调整组件。The display module according to any one of claims 1-7, characterized in that the display module further comprises a folded optical path, the folded optical path is located between the display component and the pixel position adjustment component, so The folded light path is used to transmit the target polarized light carrying any image of the multiple frames of images to the pixel position adjustment component.
  9. 一种成像控制方法,其特征在于,所述方法应用于显示设备,所述显示设备包括显示组件和像素位置调整组件,所述显示组件包括多个像素,所述多个像素中每个像素包括多个亚像素;所述方法包括:An imaging control method, characterized in that the method is applied to a display device, the display device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component, the display component includes a plurality of pixels, and each pixel in the plurality of pixels includes a plurality of sub-pixels; the method comprising:
    接收待显示图像,将所述待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到多帧图像;所述多帧图像中每帧图像的分辨率与所述显示组件的分辨率相同,所述多帧图像的分辨率小于所述待显示图像的分辨率;receiving the image to be displayed, decomposing the image to be displayed at the sub-pixel level to obtain a multi-frame image; the resolution of each frame of the multi-frame image is the same as the resolution of the display component, and the resolution of the multi-frame image rate is less than the resolution of the image to be displayed;
    控制所述像素位置调整组件分时调整所述显示组件显示的每帧图像的位置;Controlling the pixel position adjustment component to adjust the position of each frame of image displayed by the display component in time-sharing;
    其中,所述显示组件显示第一图像的时间与所述像素位置调整组件调整所述第一图像 的时间同步,所述第一图像为所述多帧图像中任一图像。Wherein, the time when the display component displays the first image is synchronized with the time when the pixel position adjustment component adjusts the first image, and the first image is any one of the multiple frames of images.
  10. 如权利要求9所述的方法,其特征在于,所述将所述待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到多帧图像,包括:The method according to claim 9, wherein said sub-pixel-level decomposition of said image to be displayed to obtain multi-frame images comprises:
    当所述显示设备的超分模式使能时,将所述待显示图像进行亚像素级分解得到多帧图像。When the super-resolution mode of the display device is enabled, the image to be displayed is decomposed at a sub-pixel level to obtain a multi-frame image.
  11. 如权利要求10所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括:The method of claim 10, further comprising:
    在所述显示设备的超分模式未使能时,对所述待显示图像进行降采样处理到待处理图像;When the super-resolution mode of the display device is not enabled, perform down-sampling processing on the image to be displayed to an image to be processed;
    将所述待处理图像输入给所述显示组件,使得所述显示组件显示待处理图像;inputting the image to be processed to the display component, so that the display component displays the image to be processed;
    通过像素位置调整组件在设定位置输出所述待处理图像。The image to be processed is output at a set position through a pixel position adjustment component.
  12. 如权利要求9-11任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一图像中的第一像素点包括的亚像素是从所述待显示图像包括的相邻的至少h个像素点包括的亚像素中采样得到的;The method according to any one of claims 9-11, wherein the sub-pixels included in the first pixel in the first image are at least h adjacent pixels included in the image to be displayed Included in sub-pixels sampled;
    其中,所述h为所述多帧图像的图像数量,所述第一图像为所述多帧图像中的任一图像,所述第一像素点是所述第一图像中的任一像素点。Wherein, the h is the number of images of the multi-frame images, the first image is any image in the multi-frame images, and the first pixel is any pixel in the first image .
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一像素点中包括的第一亚像素的像素值是根据待显示图像的设定区域包括的与所述第一亚像素的颜色相同的亚像素的像素值确定的;The method according to claim 12, wherein the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel is the same as the color of the first sub-pixel included in the set area of the image to be displayed. The pixel value of the sub-pixel is determined;
    所述设定区域的几何中心为所述第一亚像素在所述待显示图像中的采样位置。The geometric center of the set area is the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed.
  14. 如权利要求13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一像素点中包括的第一亚像素的像素值是对所述设定区域包括的与所述第一亚像素的颜色相同的亚像素的像素值进行加权求和得到;The method according to claim 13, wherein the pixel value of the first sub-pixel included in the first pixel is the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the set area. The pixel values of the pixels are weighted and summed to obtain;
    其中,所述设定区域包括的与第一亚像素颜色相同的亚像素的权重与亚像素之间距离成反比;所述亚像素之间的距离为与第一亚像素颜色相同的亚像素和所述第一亚像素在所述待显示图像中的采样位置之间的距离。Wherein, the weight of the sub-pixel with the same color as the first sub-pixel included in the setting area is inversely proportional to the distance between the sub-pixels; the distance between the sub-pixels is the sum of the sub-pixels with the same color as the first sub-pixel and The distance between sampling positions of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed.
  15. 如权利要求13或14所述的方法,其特征在于,所述显示设备为可穿戴设备,所述设定区域的大小与所述显示组件和所述可穿戴设备的成像平面之间的距离相关。The method according to claim 13 or 14, wherein the display device is a wearable device, and the size of the set area is related to the distance between the display component and the imaging plane of the wearable device .
  16. 如权利要求13-15任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述设定区域的大小与显示组件的像素尺寸相关。The method according to any one of claims 13-15, characterized in that the size of the set area is related to the pixel size of the display component.
  17. 如权利要求13-16任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述设定区域的大小与所述显示组件的显示内容相关。The method according to any one of claims 13-16, wherein the size of the setting area is related to the display content of the display component.
  18. 如权利要求13-17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一亚像素的像素值满足如下公式所示的条件:The method according to any one of claims 13-17, wherein the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
    q(i,j)=α 1*Q(i-1,j)+α 2*Q(i,j-1)+α 3*Q(i+1,j)+α 4*Q(i,j+1)+α 5*Q(i,j); q(i,j)=α 1 *Q(i-1,j)+α 2 *Q(i,j-1)+α 3 *Q(i+1,j)+α 4 *Q(i, j+1)+α 5 *Q(i,j);
    其中,q(i,j)表示第一亚像素的像素值;i表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像的像素点的横坐标;j表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像的像素点的纵坐标;Q(i,j)表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像中采样位置的亚像素的像素值;α 1,α 2,α 3,α 4和α 5分别表示权重。 Wherein, q(i, j) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel; i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel of the image to be displayed; j represents the pixel of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed The ordinate of the point; Q(i,j) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed; α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 and α 5 represent the weights respectively.
  19. 如权利要求13-17任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一亚像素的像素值满足如下公式所示的条件:The method according to any one of claims 13-17, wherein the pixel value of the first sub-pixel satisfies the condition shown in the following formula:
    q(i,j+1)=α 1*Q(i-1,j)+α 2*Q(i,j-1)+α 3*Q(i+1,j)+α 4*Q(i,j+1) q(i,j+1)=α 1 *Q(i-1,j)+α 2 *Q(i,j-1)+α 3 *Q(i+1,j)+α 4 *Q( i,j+1)
    1*Q(i-1,j+1)+β 2*Q(i,j)+β 3*Q(i+1,j+1)+β 4*Q(i,j+2); 1 *Q(i-1,j+1)+β 2 *Q(i,j)+β 3 *Q(i+1,j+1)+β 4 *Q(i,j+2) ;
    其中,q(i,j+1)表示第一亚像素的像素值,i表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像的像素点的横坐标,j+1表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像的像素点的纵坐标,Q(i,j+1)表示第一亚像素在所述待显示图像中采样位置的亚像素的像素值,α 1,α 2,α 3,α 4,β 1,β 2,β 3和β 4分别表示权重。 Wherein, q(i, j+1) represents the pixel value of the first sub-pixel, i represents the abscissa of the first sub-pixel in the pixel point of the image to be displayed, and j+1 represents the first sub-pixel in the to-be-displayed image. The ordinate of the pixel point of the displayed image, Q(i,j+1) represents the pixel value of the sub-pixel at the sampling position of the first sub-pixel in the image to be displayed, α 1 , α 2 , α 3 , α 4 , β 1 , β 2 , β 3 and β 4 denote weights, respectively.
  20. 如权利要求9-19任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述多帧图像包括所述第一图像和第二图像,所述控制所述像素位置调整组件分时调整所述显示组件显示的每帧图像的位置,包括:The method according to any one of claims 9-19, wherein the multi-frame images include the first image and the second image, and the controlling the pixel position adjustment component to adjust the display component in time division The position of each frame image displayed, including:
    分时将所述多帧图像输入给所述显示组件,使得所述显示组件分时显示所述多帧图像;inputting the multi-frame images to the display component in time division, so that the display component displays the multi-frame images in time division;
    在第一时间单元控制所述像素位置调整组件在第一位置输出所述第一图像,并控制第二时间单元控制所述像素位置调整组件在第二位置输出所述第二图像;controlling the pixel position adjustment component to output the first image at a first position in a first time unit, and controlling the pixel position adjustment component to output the second image at a second position in a second time unit;
    所述第一位置与所述第二位置在水平方向上的间隔为Px/2;或者,The distance between the first position and the second position in the horizontal direction is Px/2; or,
    所述第一位置与所述第二位置在垂直方向上的间隔为Py/2;或者,The vertical distance between the first position and the second position is Py/2; or,
    所述第一位置与所述第二位置在水平方向上的间隔为Px/2且所述第一位置与所述第二位置在垂直方向上的间隔为Py/2;The interval between the first position and the second position in the horizontal direction is Px/2 and the interval between the first position and the second position in the vertical direction is Py/2;
    所述第一时间单元和所述第二时间单元时间相邻。The first time unit and the second time unit are temporally adjacent.
  21. 如权利要求20所述的方法,其特征在于,所述像素位置调整组件包括偏振转换器和偏振位移器件;The method of claim 20, wherein the pixel position adjustment component comprises a polarization converter and a polarization shifting device;
    在第一时间单元控制所述像素位置调整组件在第一位置输出所述第一图像,并控制第二时间单元控制所述像素位置调整组件在第二位置输出所述第二图像,包括:Controlling the pixel position adjustment component to output the first image at the first position in the first time unit, and controlling the second time unit to control the pixel position adjustment component to output the second image at the second position, including:
    控制所述偏振转换器分时调整目标偏振光的偏振方向,所述目标偏振光是所述显示组件分时显示多帧图像时产生的;使得所述偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第一偏振方向时,所述偏振位移器件在第一位置输出所述目标偏振光,在偏振转换器输出的目标偏振光的偏振方向为第二偏振方向时,所述偏振位移器件在第二位置输出所述目标偏振光。Controlling the polarization converter to adjust the polarization direction of the target polarized light in time-sharing, the target polarized light is generated when the display component displays multiple frames of images in time-sharing; so that the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter When it is the first polarization direction, the polarization displacement device outputs the target polarized light at the first position, and when the polarization direction of the target polarized light output by the polarization converter is the second polarization direction, the polarization displacement device outputs the target polarized light at the second position position to output the target polarized light.
  22. 一种显示模组,其特征在于,包括显示组件、至少一个调整组件和控制组件;所述调整组件包括偏振旋转器和双折射器件;A display module, characterized in that it includes a display component, at least one adjustment component and a control component; the adjustment component includes a polarization rotator and a birefringent device;
    所述显示组件,用于接收待处理图像,并显示待处理图像,所述待处理图像的分辨率与所述显示组件的分辨率相同;The display component is used to receive the image to be processed and display the image to be processed, the resolution of the image to be processed is the same as the resolution of the display component;
    所述偏振旋转器,用于在所述控制组件的控制下调整所述待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向;The polarization rotator is used to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed under the control of the control component;
    所述双折射器件,用于对所述待处理图像包括的每个像素的光束进行分解,在第一位置输出用于投影第一子图像的第一目标偏振光以及在第二位置输出用于投影第二子图像的第二目标偏振光;The birefringent device is used to decompose the light beam of each pixel included in the image to be processed, output the first target polarized light used for projecting the first sub-image at the first position and output the polarized light used for projecting the first sub-image at the second position projecting the second target polarized light of the second sub-image;
    其中,第一像素的分解比例与第二像素的分解比例不同,所述第一像素与第二像素为所述待处理图像中偏振方向不同的两个像素,所述第一像素的分解比例为所述第一像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例,所述第二像素的分解比例为所述第二像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例。Wherein, the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is different from that of the second pixel, the first pixel and the second pixel are two pixels with different polarization directions in the image to be processed, and the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is After the light beam of the first pixel is decomposed, the ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image, the decomposition ratio of the second pixel is the ratio of the second pixel The luminous intensity of the pixels projected on the first sub-image after the light beam is decomposed is proportional to the luminous intensity of the pixels projected on the second sub-image.
  23. 如权利要求22所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述第一子图像的位置与所述第二 子图像的位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2和/或在水平方向上间隔Px/2,所述Py表示所述像素在竖直方向的间距,所述Px表示所述像素在竖直方向的间距。The display module according to claim 22, wherein the position of the first sub-image and the position of the second sub-image are vertically separated by Py/2 and/or horizontally separated by Px /2, the Py represents the pitch of the pixels in the vertical direction, and the Px represents the pitch of the pixels in the vertical direction.
  24. 如权利要求22或23所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述控制组件,具体用于控制所述偏振旋转器调整每个像素包括的亚像素的光束的偏振方向。The display module according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the control component is specifically configured to control the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beams of the sub-pixels included in each pixel.
  25. 如权利要求22-24任一项所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述待处理图像是对待显示图像进行降采样处理得到的;The display module according to any one of claims 22-24, wherein the image to be processed is obtained by downsampling the image to be displayed;
    所述控制组件,具体用于:The control assembly is specifically used for:
    根据所述待显示图像的每个像素的发光强度估计待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度;其中,所述第一子图像和所述第二子图像的分辨率相同,且小于所述待显示图像的分辨率;Estimate the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image according to the luminous intensity of each pixel of the image to be displayed; wherein, the first The sub-image and the second sub-image have the same resolution and are smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed;
    根据待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制所述偏振旋转器调整待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed according to the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image .
  26. 如权利要求22-24任一项所述的显示模组,其特征在于,所述待处理图像是对待显示图像进行降采样处理得到的;The display module according to any one of claims 22-24, wherein the image to be processed is obtained by downsampling the image to be displayed;
    所述控制组件,具体用于:The control assembly is specifically used for:
    估计并调整待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,使得调整后的第一子图像和第二子图像叠加投影后的图像与所述待显示图像的相似度大于设定阈值;所述设定阈值是根据人眼对图像差异的感知能力确定的;Estimating and adjusting the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image, so that the adjusted first sub-image and the second sub-image superpose the projected The similarity between the image and the image to be displayed is greater than a set threshold; the set threshold is determined according to the human eye's ability to perceive image differences;
    根据调整后的第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制所述偏振旋转器调整所述待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。According to the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image, the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed.
  27. 一种成像控制方法,其特征在于,所述方法应用于可穿戴设备,所述可穿戴设备包括显示组件和像素位置调整组件,所述像素位置调整组件包括偏振旋转器和双折射器件;所述方法包括:An imaging control method, wherein the method is applied to a wearable device, the wearable device includes a display component and a pixel position adjustment component, and the pixel position adjustment component includes a polarization rotator and a birefringent device; the Methods include:
    接收待显示图像,对所述待显示图像进行降采样处理得到待处理图像,并将所述待处理图像输入给所述显示组件,使得所述显示组件发射承载所述待显示图像的目标偏振光,其中,所述目标帧图像为所述多帧图像中的一帧图像,所述待处理图像的分辨率与所述显示组件的分辨率相同;receiving an image to be displayed, performing down-sampling processing on the image to be displayed to obtain an image to be processed, and inputting the image to be processed to the display component, so that the display component emits target polarized light carrying the image to be displayed , wherein the target frame image is one frame image in the multiple frame images, and the resolution of the image to be processed is the same as the resolution of the display component;
    控制所述偏振旋转器调整输出的所述待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,使得双折射器件对所述待处理图像包括的每个像素的光束进行分解,在第一位置输出用于投影第一子图像的第一目标偏振光以及在第二位置输出用于投影第二子图像的第二目标偏振光;Controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed, so that the birefringent device decomposes the light beam of each pixel included in the image to be processed, and output the light beam at the first position with outputting a first target polarized light for projecting a first sub-image and outputting a second target polarized light for projecting a second sub-image at a second position;
    其中,第一像素的分解比例与第二像素的分解比例不同,所述第一像素与第二像素为所述待处理图像中偏振方向不同的两个像素,所述第一像素的分解比例为所述第一像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例,所述第二像素的分解比例为所述第二像素的光束经过分解后投影在第一子图像的像素的发光强度与投影在第二子图像的像素的发光强度比例。Wherein, the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is different from that of the second pixel, the first pixel and the second pixel are two pixels with different polarization directions in the image to be processed, and the decomposition ratio of the first pixel is After the light beam of the first pixel is decomposed, the ratio of the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the first sub-image to the luminous intensity of the pixel projected on the second sub-image, the decomposition ratio of the second pixel is the ratio of the second pixel The luminous intensity of the pixels projected on the first sub-image after the light beam is decomposed is proportional to the luminous intensity of the pixels projected on the second sub-image.
  28. 如权利要求27所述的方法,其特征在于,所述第一子图像的位置与所述第二子图像的位置在垂直方向上间隔为Py/2和/或在水平方向上间隔Px/2,所述Py表示所述像素在竖直方向的间距,所述Px表示所述像素在竖直方向的间距。The method according to claim 27, wherein the position of the first sub-image and the position of the second sub-image are vertically separated by Py/2 and/or horizontally separated by Px/2 , the Py represents the pitch of the pixels in the vertical direction, and the Px represents the pitch of the pixels in the vertical direction.
  29. 如权利要求27或28所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制所述偏振旋转器调整输出 的所述待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,包括:The method according to claim 27 or 28, wherein the controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the output image to be processed comprises:
    控制所述偏振旋转器调整所述待处理图像的每个像素包括的亚像素的光束的偏振方向。Controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beams of the sub-pixels included in each pixel of the image to be processed.
  30. 如权利要求27-29任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制所述偏振旋转器调整输出的所述待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,包括:The method according to any one of claims 27-29, wherein the controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the output polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed comprises:
    根据所述待显示图像的每个像素的发光强度估计待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度;其中,所述第一子图像和所述第二子图像的分辨率相同,且小于所述待显示图像的分辨率;Estimate the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image according to the luminous intensity of each pixel of the image to be displayed; wherein, the first The sub-image and the second sub-image have the same resolution and are smaller than the resolution of the image to be displayed;
    根据待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制所述偏振旋转器调整待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed according to the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image .
  31. 如权利要求27-29任一项所述的方法,其特征在于,所述控制所述偏振旋转器调整输出的所述待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向,包括:The method according to any one of claims 27-29, wherein the controlling the polarization rotator to adjust the output polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed comprises:
    估计并调整待投影为第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和待投影为第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,使得调整后的第一子图像和第二子图像叠加投影后的图像与所述待显示图像的相似度大于设定阈值;所述设定阈值是根据人眼对图像差异的感知能力确定的;Estimating and adjusting the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel to be projected as the second sub-image, so that the adjusted first sub-image and the second sub-image superpose the projected The similarity between the image and the image to be displayed is greater than a set threshold; the set threshold is determined according to the human eye's ability to perceive image differences;
    根据调整后的第一子图像的每个像素的发光强度和第二子图像的每个像素的发光强度,控制所述偏振旋转器调整所述待处理图像的每个像素的光束的偏振方向。According to the adjusted luminous intensity of each pixel of the first sub-image and the luminous intensity of each pixel of the second sub-image, the polarization rotator is controlled to adjust the polarization direction of the light beam of each pixel of the image to be processed.
PCT/CN2022/121488 2021-09-30 2022-09-26 Display module and imaging control method WO2023051479A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202111164540.X 2021-09-30
CN202111164540.XA CN115909913A (en) 2021-09-30 2021-09-30 Display module and imaging control method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023051479A1 true WO2023051479A1 (en) 2023-04-06

Family

ID=85729581

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2022/121488 WO2023051479A1 (en) 2021-09-30 2022-09-26 Display module and imaging control method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115909913A (en)
WO (1) WO2023051479A1 (en)

Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0463332A (en) * 1990-07-02 1992-02-28 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> Projection display device
JP2003222832A (en) * 2001-11-22 2003-08-08 Sharp Corp Image shifting element and image display device
CN1533563A (en) * 2001-05-09 2004-09-29 ������Ү��ʵ�������޹�˾ Converson of a sub-pixel format data to another sub-pixel data format
CN104680949A (en) * 2015-03-25 2015-06-03 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Pixel array, display drive method, display drive device and display device
CN106023909A (en) * 2016-08-12 2016-10-12 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display device and display method thereof
CN111866588A (en) * 2019-04-30 2020-10-30 深圳光峰科技股份有限公司 Image splitting method and image display method
CN112005161A (en) * 2018-03-30 2020-11-27 华为技术有限公司 Imaging device, display apparatus, and imaging apparatus
CN113156744A (en) * 2020-01-23 2021-07-23 亘冠智能技术(杭州)有限公司 Double-refraction-principle-based DMD projection system with multiplied resolution
CN113452942A (en) * 2021-06-03 2021-09-28 华东师范大学 4k resolution video image preprocessing method for digital micromirror chip
CN113489960A (en) * 2021-06-30 2021-10-08 青岛海信激光显示股份有限公司 Projection display device, method and system
CN113542701A (en) * 2020-04-20 2021-10-22 青岛海信激光显示股份有限公司 Projection display method and projection equipment

Patent Citations (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0463332A (en) * 1990-07-02 1992-02-28 Nippon Telegr & Teleph Corp <Ntt> Projection display device
CN1533563A (en) * 2001-05-09 2004-09-29 ������Ү��ʵ�������޹�˾ Converson of a sub-pixel format data to another sub-pixel data format
JP2003222832A (en) * 2001-11-22 2003-08-08 Sharp Corp Image shifting element and image display device
CN104680949A (en) * 2015-03-25 2015-06-03 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Pixel array, display drive method, display drive device and display device
CN106023909A (en) * 2016-08-12 2016-10-12 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Display device and display method thereof
CN112005161A (en) * 2018-03-30 2020-11-27 华为技术有限公司 Imaging device, display apparatus, and imaging apparatus
CN111866588A (en) * 2019-04-30 2020-10-30 深圳光峰科技股份有限公司 Image splitting method and image display method
CN113156744A (en) * 2020-01-23 2021-07-23 亘冠智能技术(杭州)有限公司 Double-refraction-principle-based DMD projection system with multiplied resolution
CN113542701A (en) * 2020-04-20 2021-10-22 青岛海信激光显示股份有限公司 Projection display method and projection equipment
CN113452942A (en) * 2021-06-03 2021-09-28 华东师范大学 4k resolution video image preprocessing method for digital micromirror chip
CN113489960A (en) * 2021-06-30 2021-10-08 青岛海信激光显示股份有限公司 Projection display device, method and system

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN115909913A (en) 2023-04-04

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
Haas 40‐2: Invited paper: Microdisplays for augmented and virtual reality
TWI592919B (en) Superresolution display using cascaded panels
Lueder 3D Displays
US8681075B2 (en) Display device and electronic appliance
JP5631739B2 (en) Method and device for providing privacy to a display
US20230236426A1 (en) Ghost image mitigation in see-through displays with pixel arrays
US20230324744A1 (en) Geometries for mitigating artifacts in see-through pixel arrays
JP2010078653A (en) Stereoscopic image display
US10546521B2 (en) Resolutions by modulating both amplitude and phase in spatial light modulators
US20200333662A1 (en) Alignment cells for modulating both amplitude and phase in spatial light modulators
US20230350248A1 (en) Spatial light modulators modulating both amplitude and phase
US11521572B2 (en) Holographic displays with light modulation in amplitude and phase
US10775617B2 (en) Eye tracked lens for increased screen resolution
Zhang et al. A resolution-enhanced digital micromirror device (DMD) projection system
WO2023051479A1 (en) Display module and imaging control method
Wetzstein et al. State of the art in perceptual VR displays
Lu et al. 59‐1: Liquid Crystal Technology for Solving Key Optical Challenges in Virtual and Augmented Realities
Wu et al. 70‐3: Invited Paper: High‐Resolution Light‐Field VR LCD
JP6329792B2 (en) Display device
US10540930B1 (en) Apparatus, systems, and methods for temperature-sensitive illumination of liquid crystal displays
Yoo et al. 15 focal planes head-mounted display using led array backlight
Wetzstein et al. Factored displays: improving resolution, dynamic range, color reproduction, and light field characteristics with advanced signal processing
US20230282177A1 (en) Foveated display and driving scheme
US11422458B2 (en) Nano-stamping to create two different gratings to modulate light in amplitude and phase via liquid crystals
JP2006208868A (en) Three-dimensional display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 22874864

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1